A Foodcentric Life

  • Best Fall Recipes
  • Meet Chef Sally
  • Recipe Index
  • Subscribe
menu icon
go to homepage
  • Best Fall Recipes
  • Meet Chef Sally
  • Recipe Index
  • Subscribe
    • Facebook
    • Instagram
    • LinkedIn
    • Pinterest
  • search icon
    Homepage link
    • Best Fall Recipes
    • Meet Chef Sally
    • Recipe Index
    • Subscribe
    • Facebook
    • Instagram
    • LinkedIn
    • Pinterest
  • ×
    Home » Recipes

    Leftover Turkey Casserole (Tetrazzini)

    11/26/2011 by Sally Cameron 10 Comments

    turkey tetrazinni casserole

    This leftover turkey casserole is an American classic called a Tetrazzini and a favorite dish to make with leftover Thanksgiving turkey.  Good thing it works with chicken too, because this comfort food casserole is something you'll want to make more often than just after Thanksgiving.

    turkey tetrazinni casserole.

    Classic recipes are filled with butter, heavy cream and white pasta. While these versions might taste good, I wanted a healthier dish to fit with today's healthier eating preferences.

    I switched out the white pasta for whole wheat, made the sauce with whole wheat pastry flour instead of white flour, used homemade turkey broth instead of cream and added peas for color and a little extra vegetables. Parmesan-Reggiano cheese, dry sherry and a little nutmeg add flavor.

    Make a Roux: Classic Sauce Thickener

    The base for the sauce is called a roux (pronounced roo), a classic combination of cooked flour and fat used as a thickener in sauces.

    Traditionally white flour is used. I've used whole wheat pastry flour instead, giving it a nutty flavor and golden color. For the fat, I've combined a little butter with olive oil instead of all butter. You can use a GF flour blend as well.

    turkey tetrazinni casserole

    Three Steps to Make the Casserole

    There are three steps to putting this casserole together:

    • Make the sauce
    • Cook the pasta and vegetables
    • Mix with turkey and bake

    Just add a tossed green salad for balance and dinner is ready.

    📖 Recipe

    turkey tetrazzini casserole | AFoodcentricLife.com

    Leftover Turkey Casserole (Tetrazzini)

    Sally Cameron
    Classic comfort food, this casserole is made for leftover turkey or chicken. Instead of a cream-based sauce, it uses a broth-based sauce. If you make it ahead, it re-heats well. There are three steps: cook the pasta, cook the vegetables, and make the sauce. Then mix and bake. A tossed green salad is all you need to complete dinner.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 30 minutes mins
    Cook Time 45 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr 15 minutes mins
    Course Dinner, Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4
    Calories 605 kcal

    Equipment

    • casserole baking dish

    Ingredients
      

    Crumb Topping

    • ¼ cup toasted breadcrumbs preferably homemade, whole wheat or GF
    • 2 tablespoons grated Parmesan-Reggiano cheese
    • 1 teaspoon extra virgin olive oil

    Sauce

    • 1 tablespoon unsalted butter
    • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
    • ¼ cup all purpose flour or GF blend flour
    • 2 cups turkey or chicken broth low or no sodium
    • ⅓ cup grated Parmesan-Reggiano cheese
    • 2 tablespoons dry sherry optional
    • 2 teaspoons fresh chopped thyme leaves
    • ⅛ teaspoon freshly grated nutmeg
    • 2 teaspoons fresh lemon juice
    • salt and pepper to taste

    Filling

    • 8 ounces penne pasta whole wheat or gluten-free
    • 1 tablespoon extra virgin olive oil
    • ½ medium onion chopped fine
    • 8 ounces fresh mushrooms cleaned, stemmed, and sliced thick
    • 2 cloves garlic chopped fine
    • 12 ounces diced cooked turkey or chicken about 3 cups chopped
    • ½ cup   peas thawed if frozen

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Make Topping

    • Mix toasted breadcrumbs, cheese and olive oil in a small bowl and set aside. Heat oven to 375 degrees.

    Make the Sauce

    • Place the butter and olive oil in a medium saucepan over medium heat. When butter and oil are bubbly, add the whole wheat flour and whisk together, cooking one minute to remove the raw flour taste.  Slowly add the broth, whisking to incorporate and cook until it starts to thicken. When it's ready it will coat the back of a spoon and you'll be able to draw your finger through it.
    • Off the heat, stir in the cheese, dry sherry, thyme, nutmeg and lemon juice. Season with a little salt and pepper.  Set sauce aside.

    Cook the Pasta

    • Bring water to a boil in a 4-5 quart pan. Add a tablespoon of kosher or sea salt to the water; add pasta and cook according to package directions. Drain and set aside.

    Cook Vegetables

    • While pasta is boiling, cook the onions in olive oil over medium to medium-low heat in a saute pan or skillet. When the onions are soft and translucent, add the mushrooms. Stir and cook the mushrooms until they are are browned and most of their moisture is gone. Stir in the garlic and cook another 30 seconds. Stir in the turkey (or chicken) and peas.

    Assemble the Casserole

    • In a large bowl, mix the cooked pasta together with the sauce, vegetables and turkey (or chicken). Spray a medium casserole, about 1 ½ - 2 quarts with non-stick spray and pour the pasta mixture in. Sprinkle with the breadcrumbs and bake until hot and crumbs are golden on top, 30-45 minutes. Use a digital thermometer and cook until casserole reaches 165°F.

    Notes

    To make sauces I use a pan called a saucier with sloped sides. instead of straight sides Easier for whisking and stirring. 
    If your topping starts to brown too quickly, cover with foil when it’s golden and continue to bake until the casserole is 160-165 degrees internally. Let the casserole sit for a few minutes, then serve.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 605kcalCarbohydrates: 60gProtein: 43gFat: 22gSaturated Fat: 6gPolyunsaturated Fat: 3gMonounsaturated Fat: 11gTrans Fat: 0.1gCholesterol: 87mgSodium: 280mgPotassium: 671mgFiber: 8gSugar: 4gVitamin A: 381IUVitamin C: 14mgCalcium: 177mgIron: 5mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Pan-Seared Halibut with Lemon Caper Vinaigrette

    01/29/2012 by Sally Cameron 10 Comments

    halibut with lemon caper sauce

    Pan-seared halibut, cooked in a non-stick skillet and gently steam finished with a splash of white wine, makes for an easy and flavorful dinner. A simple lemon caper vinaigrette elevates the dish, doubling as a light and tangy sauce. You'll have a healthy, delicious meal ready in minutes. If you love fish but feel intimidated by cooking it at home, this foolproof technique will change your mind. I'll show you how easy it is!

    halibut with lemon caper

    It's winter and the Alaskan halibut I love is still months away from availability, so I'm cooking with fresh local halibut. These pearly white filets are thinner and smaller than their Alaskan cousins, but still delicious and definitely more affordable. This has become my "go-to" recipe for a fast fish dinner. I've probably made it five times in the past few weeks, for the two of us and dinner guests as well.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • It's an easy, healthy dinner.
    • A simple way to cook fish that's practically fail proof.
    • Using a non-stick pan insures the fish does not stick.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Halibut

    • Fish: Fresh halibut filets without skin, or if frozen, thawed.
    • Liquid: Dry white wine, lemon water, or vegetable broth.
    • Oil: Extra virgin olive oil or avocado oil.

    Lemon Caper Vinaigrette Dressing

    • Oil - Extra virgin olive oil or avocado oil.
    • Lemon - The juice, for bright flavor and acid to balance and zest for more lemon flavor.
    • Capers - Get the small ones called "non-pareil".
    • Herbs - Fresh chopped parsley
    • Shallots - Optional but adds nice flavor.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt, and pepper.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • If you can't find halibut, use wild cod or other mild white fish.
    • Add a little creamy Dijon mustard to the vinaigrette to make it creamy as Dijon emulsifies a vinaigrette.
    • Try different softer herbs, like a little tarragon or chervil.

    Recipe Instructions

    Step 1: Pat the fish dry then season it with sea salt and ground black pepper. Sometimes I add a little garlic powder or use lemon pepper. If the filets are long and thin, with the smooth side (or top side) down, fold in the thin ends of the filet. After folding your filets, turn them over. Drizzle the top with olive oil then season with sea salt and black pepper.

    lemon caper halibut | afoodcentriclife.com

    Step 2: Heat a non-stick pan over medium heat. Add the filets seasoned side down. Don't touch them for a few minutes, allowing a golden crust to form. Peak underneath to test.

    pan roasted halibut | afoodcentriclife.com

    Chef's tip on working with long thin fish filets: Long, thin tapered fish filets can be tricky to work with. They can be too long to fit in a pan or fall apart when you turn them. They don't present as impressively as a thicker filet. The solution? Fold them. This creates a thicker, more uniform piece of fish to work with.

    Step 3: Turn the filets over, add white wine to the pan and quickly clamp on a tight fitting lid. If you have them, glass lids work well so you can see what's going on in the pan.

    Turn the heat down. Depending on the thickness of your filets, your fish will steam to completion in just a few minutes. The halibut should be barely opaque in the center when done (140°). To keep the fish moist, don't overcook it.

    pan roasted halibut | afoodcentriclife.com

    Serving Suggestions

    To dress the pan roasted halibut, make a light and flavorful vinaigrette with olive oil, lemon juice, parsley and capers. Spoon a tablespoon over the fish when you serve. For extra lemon flavor, add a small wedge of lemon to squeeze over the top.

    What sides pair well with pan-seared halibut? Glad you asked. Serve it with rice or quinoa, roast vegetables, and a side salad is nice for balance. The fish is simple so you can serve it different way and even with different sauces.

    Sauce Options

    To change things up, use the basic technique to cook the fish and try one of these sauces:

    • Since halibut is lean, a rich sauce like this brilliant orange paprika sauce.
    • For a tropical fresh finish, make this pineapple mango salsa or a creamy citrus mango sauce.
    • For a little Mexican flare, use this easy tomatillo sauce.

    Recipe FAQs

    Why is my halibut dry after cooking?

    You likely accidentally over-cooked it. Don't walk away from the stove and watch your timing. Fish cooks quick! It takes just minutes. If it happens, be sure there is enough sauce for moisture and flavor, maybe a creamy style sauce.

    How do I store leftover cooked halibut?

    If you have leftover halibut, store in an airtight container and use the next day. Leftover fish does not last. And for what to do with it, try flaking it and making fish tacos.

    What's a good substitute for halibut?

    Alternative white fish include cod, sea bass, or grouper, mahi mahi, or haddock.

    More Seafood Recipes

    For another halibut recipe try this oven roasted halbitu with tomatoes.

    📖 Recipe

    lemon caper halibut | afoodcentriclife.com

    Pan Roasted Halibut with Lemon Caper Vinaigrette

    Sally Cameron
    Thin filets of halibut make a fast and healthy dinner. Top with a bright and flavorful vinaigrette of lemon juice, parsley and capers to use as a sauce. A tip on cooking with wine: if you don't drink wine but like to cook with it on occasion, buy the mini plastic bottles (airline size). They work great for cooking when only a small amount is needed. You can also use water or broth instead of wine.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 10 minutes mins
    Total Time 20 minutes mins
    Course Seafood
    Cuisine American
    Servings 1
    Calories 180 kcal

    Equipment

    • Non-stick pan with lid

    Ingredients
      

    Vinaigrette

    • 4 tablespoons olive oil
    • 2 tablespoons lemon juice
    • 2 teaspoons capers rinsed and drained
    • 1 teaspoon fresh chopped parsley
    • 1 teaspoon finely chopped shallot
    • ½ teaspoon  fine lemon zest
    • 1-2 pinches lemon pepper or regular pepper

    Halibut

    • 4 4-6 ounce halibut filets
    • ⅔ cup dry white wine sub lemon water or vegetable broth

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Make the Vinaigrette

    • Whisk together olive oil, lemon, juice, lemon zest, capers, shallots, and parsley. Season with a pinch of salt and pepper and set aside to dress fish at serving.

    Cook the Halibut

    • Heat a non-stick pan over medium heat. If using thin filets, fold the thin tail ends towards the center creating a more uniform piece of fish. Drizzle the top of the filet with olive oil and season. Place the fish top (seasoned) side down in the hot pan and cook for a few minutes until a golden crust forms. Turn the filets over, pour in the white wine and immediately place a tight fitting lid on top of the pan. Turn the heat down a bit to low and allow the filets to steam finish in the wine. It will only take a few minutes (about 3-5), depending on the thickness of the fish. When done, fish should be barley opaque in the center. To test with a digital thermometer it should be at 145°F. To serve, drizzle with a little of the vinaigrette.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 2Calories: 180kcalCarbohydrates: 3gProtein: 1gFat: 14gSaturated Fat: 2gCholesterol: 1mgSodium: 32mgPotassium: 77mgFiber: 1gSugar: 1gVitamin A: 13IUVitamin C: 6mgCalcium: 11mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    How to Roast a Whole Chicken (sear first method)

    02/27/2012 by Sally Cameron 8 Comments

    whole roast chicken

    Whole roast chicken is a Sunday dinner tradition in our house and an enduring classic recipe. Golden and crisp-skinned, the classic simplicity of a whole roast chicken is always welcome. If you have any leftovers, it makes great meals during the week. Never done a whole chicken? Let me show you how using a different method that produces great results.

    Crispy golden brown roast chicken in cast iron skillet on oven rack

    I've roasted many whole chickens with varying techniques. With a v-rack and a vertical roaster. Starting the bird breast side down and turning half way through. I've tried tying, or trussing the bird, or not.

    Many of the techniques produced a good roast chicken. At times the results were inconsistent or the appearance not as eye-appealing as I wanted. Here is the best method in my opinion: sear first on the stovetop, then finish in the oven.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • Roast chicken is a classic recipe everyone cook should know.
    • This method makes gives you crisp skin.
    • Once you do it you won't need the recipe. It's about technique.

    Recipe Ingredients

    • Whole chicken: Buy a whole, fresh, chicken.
    • Oil: Olive oil is what I use, but you could use a healthy neutral oil like this. It's terrific.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements. You also need kitchen twine.

    Recipe Instructions

    It was chef Tom Colicchio's method of searing the chicken first on the stovetop that inspired me to start using this method. It's always how I start my bone-in chicken breasts and many meat dishes, so it made sense.

    A seasoned whole chicken, legs tied and ready for roasting on a wood cutting board.

    Step 1: Prep the Chicken

    Get the chicken out of the refrigerator an hour ahead of time. Unwrap it and let it get the chill off. Don't worry, it is a food-safe practice and in my experience gives you better results.

    Remove any fat globs near the cavity opening and the tail and discard. Pat the bird dry with a paper towel. Remove any bag of "innards" inside the cavity of the bird and discard. Wipe out the cavity with a paper towel. Sprinkle a little salt inside the cavity. Tie the legs together and bend the wings back under the body.

    Step 2: Sear the Chicken

    Pre-heat your oven to 375 degrees. Heat a cast iron skillet over medium heat. While the pan is heating, drizzle all olive oil over the bird and season. Place chicken in the hot pan bottom side down and sear for a few minutes until you achieve a golden crust. Watch your heat level and turn the heat down if needed so as not to burn the chicken.

    When you get a golden crust on the bottom, turn the chicken breast side down and do the same. When the breast side is golden, stand the chicken on it's sides (on the wings) and sear the sides.

    A whole chicken being seared in a cast iron pan on all sides before roasting

    Step 3: Roast the Chicken

    When done searing chicken on all sides and you have a golden exterior, place the pan with the chicken breast side up in the oven to finish roasting. Works like a charm. You get crisp, golden skin and moist meat.

    Roast until a digital thermometer reads 175°F degrees in the deep part of the thigh without touching the bone. Timing will depend on the size of your chicken. A 4 to 4 ½ pound chicken will take approximately 60 minutes in the oven.

    Chef's tip: The searing process is where tying the legs helps; the chicken is more stable when on its sides. This may seem a little awkward, but work with it. You'll get the hang of it. I use silicone tipped tongs to make handling the chicken easier as the edges are soft and don't tear the skin.

    Step 4: Rest and Carve the Chicken

    Remove the chicken from the oven and allow it to rest for 10 minutes. While the chicken is roasting, make a side dish and salad to complete dinner.

    To carve a whole chicken, first cut off the leg-thigh pieces using a heavy Chefs or French knife. Slice the skin on the side of the bird between the breast and thigh. Pull the leg piece back until the joint is exposed. I pull mine back until it pops, then it's easy to see where to cut above the joint.

    Next cut off the wings, then cut down the center breast bone and free the chicken breasts by running the knife down along the rib cage. See the photos for help.

    Carving a whole roast chicken on a cutting board.

    After dinner, pick off any chicken meat still clinging to the body and save for chicken salad, tacos, quesadillas or soup.

    Thrifty Option: Save the Body for Broth

    If you want, save the roast chicken carcass and freeze. When I get 4-5 stored in the freezer, I use them to make homemade chicken broth. To fit more into an airtight container, cut as much of the body up as possible with a heavy knife or poultry scissors.

    Whole roast chicken on a platter at the table.

    In summer I rotisserie outside. If you have a grill with the attachment, here is my recipe.  What to serve with your roast chicken? How about sour cream mashed potatoes?

    📖 Recipe

    whole roast chicken | afoodcentriclife.com

    How to Roast a Whole Chicken

    Sally Cameron
    If you enjoy chicken but have never learned to roast a whole one, try this easy technique for a gloriously golden, crisp bird. Leftovers make great chicken salad, sandwiches, soup, tacos or quesadillas.  Save and freeze the carcass to make chicken stock.  To season chicken, a citrus pepper blend is nice too.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 1 hour hr
    Total Time 1 hour hr 10 minutes mins
    Course Chicken
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4 to 6
    Calories 549 kcal

    Equipment

    • Cast iron pan
    • Kitchen twine

    Ingredients
      

    • 4 ½ pound whole chicken
    • 2 teaspoons extra virgin olive oil
    • 1 ½ teaspoons sea salt
    • 1 ½ teaspoons ground black pepper
    • 1 teaspoon granulated garlic optional

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Remove the chicken from the refrigerator, unwrap and allow to stand for one hour at room temperature. Wash the chicken with cold water, discarding any packet of innards. Remove any extra fat globs around the cavity opening. Dry well with paper towels.
    • Tie the chicken legs together with kitchen twine and trim off wing tips with kitchen scissors or shears, then season the chicken liberally with Florida Seasoned Pepper. Add salt if you prefer. Alternatively use coarse ground black pepper, granulated garlic and a coarse salt such as kosher or seal salt. Drizzle with olive oil.
    • Pre-heat the oven to 375 degrees (190 C). Heat a cast iron skillet over medium heat. Place the chicken in the hot pan bottom side down and sear for a few minutes until you achieve a golden crust. Watch your heat level and turn the heat down if needed so as not to burn the chicken. When you get a golden crust on the bottom, turn the chicken breast side down and do the same. When the breast side is golden, stand the chicken on the sides and sear both sides.
    • When the chicken is golden all over, turn the chicken breast side up and put the pan in the oven. Roast until a digital thermometer reads 165 degrees in the deep part of the thigh. Timing will depend on the size of your chicken. A 4 ½ pound (2 kilo) chicken will take approximately 60 minutes in my convection oven.

    Notes

    Refrigerate leftover chicken as soon as possible and freeze the carcass to make chicken stock.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 549kcalCarbohydrates: 1gProtein: 46gFat: 39gSaturated Fat: 11gPolyunsaturated Fat: 8gMonounsaturated Fat: 17gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 184mgSodium: 1044mgPotassium: 482mgFiber: 0.3gSugar: 0.02gVitamin A: 347IUVitamin C: 4mgCalcium: 31mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Healthy Shepherd's Pie (Vegetarian)

    03/26/2012 by Sally Cameron 27 Comments

    vegetarian shepherds pie

    Healthy Shepherd's Pie is packed with savory vegetables and beans, herbs, and spices, then topped with creamy mashed potatoes. It delivers classic shepherd's-pie comfort in a lighter, meatless way-cozy enough to satisfy the carnivores, and naturally gluten-free. Serve it as a comforting casserole-style main dish, or pair as a hearty side with roast chicken. And if you want to add meat? All is good.

    Four ramekins of vegetarian Shepherds pie with mashed potato toppings.

    Traditionally, shepherd's pie is made with lamb and a cottage pie, with beef. This vegetarian version swaps the meat for a hearty medley of vegetables-onion, carrot, celery, tomatoes, green beans, corn, and peas-plus red and white kidney beans for protein. It's finished with a blanket of creamy mashed potatoes for a satisfying, family-friendly dinner.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why Make a Healthy Shepherds Pie

    • Hearty & satisfying - Cozy comfort without the meat.
    • Plant-based - Beans and veggies deliver depth, protein, and texture.
    • Prep-ahead - Assemble now, bake later (or batch the components).
    • Flexible - add ground turkey, chicken, or beef if you like.

    For another hearty vegetarian lunch or dinner, try this Instant Pot Lentil Soup.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Don't let the long list of ingredient scare you from making this. It is not as much work as it looks!

    A tray of assorted vegetable and beans in prep bowls for making vegetarian Shepherds pie.
    • Potatoes - Gold potatoes for creamy mashed, or russets for a fluffier, lighter topping.
    • Milk - Dairy or plant-based, for the mashed potatoes.
    • Butter - Dairy or plant-based; adds silkiness to the potatoes.
    • Olive oil - For sautéing the aromatics and adding healthy fat.
    • Onion - Classic flavor base; builds savory depth.
    • Celery - Adds aromatic flavor and gentle crunch.
    • Carrots - Sweet, earthy balance to the savory filling.
    • Garlic cloves - Fresh garlic for punch.
    • Tomato paste - Concentrated savory richness.
    • Liquid - Vegetable broth or water.
    • Dried herbs - Basil, oregano, thyme, or a blend for classic flavors.
    • Paprika - Adds warmth and color.
    • Diced tomatoes - Juicy, acidic balance to the hearty filling.
    • Corn kernels - Natural sweetness and texture, fresh or frozen.
    • Peas - Frozen thawed is fine; classic shepherd's pie touch.
    • Green beans - Baby green beans are most tender if you can get them.
    • Beans - Red kidney beans and Cannellini beans (white kidney beans).

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt, and pepper.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Swap potatoes - Use whipped sweet potatoes instead of gold or russet potatoes.
    • Dairy-free - Use pant butter and plant milk.
    • Southwestern flavor - Add a little ground cumin, coriander, chili powder, and use smoked paprika.
    • Swap for lentils - Lentils are also excellent for a more traditional shepherd's pie texture, swap out for 1 can of the beans.

    Ever made Italian Ribollita? It's a satisfying soup so thick it's like a hearty vegetable stew. Another recipe to add to your must try list.

    Baking Vessels & Timing

    This recipe makes 4 individual shepherd's pies or a single casserole to serve 4. For vessels try:

    • 10-oz ramekins
      Bake at 350°F for about 30 minutes, or until heated through to 165°F and the tops are lightly golden.
    • 8×8 baking dish
      Spread the filling into one family-style casserole. Bake at 350°F for 30-40 minutes, until hot in the center at 165°F and lightly browned on top.
    • Tip: For extra browning, broil for 1-2 minutes and watch closely.

    How to Make Healthy Shepherds Pie

    There's a bit of prep work for the vegetables. Assemble all of your prepped vegetables and ingredients in bowls (called mise en place) and put them on a half-sheet tray for better organization and ease of preparation. Prepping ahead speeds things up.

    Make the mashed potato topping

    For fluffy textured potatoes, I use a tool called a ricer. The filling and the mashed potatoes can be made ahead of time.

    A glass bowl of clean peeled russet potatoes ready to cook.
    1. Scrub and peel potatoes.
    Chopped potatoes on a white cutting board with a chefs knife.
    1. Cut potatoes into approximately same sized pieces.
    Potatoes simmering in a pot of water with small bubbles on top.
    1. Simmer potatoes in lightly salted water until tender but not falling apart.
    Cooked potatoes in a colander pierced with a paring knife showing doneness.
    1. When done, you should be able to pierce potatoes through with a knife. After this, hand mash them or use a ricer (which is what I do).
    Riced mashed potatoes being finished with butter and milk.
    1. Add milk and butter.
    Creamy finished riced mashed potatoes with a stirring spoon in a pot
    1. Stir until creamy and fluffy, taste and add salt and pepper to balance.

    Make the vegetable filling

    Sauteing tomatoes, onions, garlic and tomato paste in a skillets on the stove.
    1. Saute onion, carrot, and celery until soft, 3 minutes. Add garlic and cook 30 seconds. Add tomatoes, tomatoes paste, water, herbs, paprika. Cook to blend flavors.
    Adding peas and green veggoes to a pan of tomatoes and other vegetables for healthy shepherds pie.
    1. Stir in green beans, corn, and peas and cook for a few minutes to blend. Season with salt and pepper.
    Adding red and white beans to a pan of vegetables for shepherds pie filling.
    1. Add the beans and stir well to incorporate. Divide the filling between large ramekins or into a casserole and top with the mashed potatoes.
    Filling ramekins for healthy Shepherd's pie from a skillet on the stove.
    1. Bake in a 350°F oven until the filling reaches 165°F. A few minutes under the broiler will brown the tops if desired, but be careful not to burn the potatoes. If you'd like, gently brush with a little olive oil or melted butter.

    Serving Healthy Shepherds Pie

    Add a fresh green salad. Toss baby greens with olive oil, lemon, and a pinch of sea salt for a bright contrast. Not much else is needed.

    Reheating & Freezing

    Reheating

    • Bake at 350°F until the center reaches 165°F; time depends on how cold it is out of the refrigerator, 30-50 minutes. For extra color, broil 1-3 minutes at the end-watch closely.
    • Single portions: microwave covered in short bursts on 70% power until hot, then crisp the top under the broiler if desired.

    Freezing

    • Assemble the filling only and freeze up to 3 months. Thaw overnight in the fridge, make fresh mashed potatoes, top, and bake at 350°F to 165°F internal.
    • I don't recommend freezing mashed potatoes; fresh yields the best texture.

    Storage Tips

    • Cool completely before covering. Label with date.
    • Refrigerate up to 4 days; reheat as above.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I make Shepherd's Pie ahead?

    Yes. Assemble, cover, and refrigerate up to 24 hours. Bake when ready to serve.

    Can I add meat?

    Yes, easily. Brown ground turkey, chicken, or beef with the aromatics and proceed with the recipe. You might want to reduce the canned beans as well.

    How do I make it dairy-free?

    Use plant-based butter and milk in the mashed potatoes. For mashed potatoes try unsweetened plain oat milk, organic soy milk, or cashew milk. Also try canned light coconut milk for extra richness.

    More Cozy, Comforting Dinner Recipes

    Warm, comforting dishes with big flavor - from creamy risotto to hearty soup and family-favorite classics.

    • A gray bowl of pumpkin risotto with a golden spoon and sage leaves.
      Creamy Pumpkin Risotto With Sage
    • Stuffed shells with kale and ricotta
      Pasta Shells Stuffed With Ricotta
    • Ribollita in a gray pot.
      Italian Ribollita Soup (Ribollita Toscana)
    • Close up of creamy pork chops with sauce.
      Sour Cream Pork Chops Recipe

    Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this healthy shepherd's pie recipe, please let me know how it came out for you. I love hearing from you and comments help other readers too. And please leave a star rating.

    Mexican Chicken Tortilla Soup Recipe

    03/18/2023 by Sally Cameron 6 Comments

    Close up of Mexican chicken soup in a white bowl.

    This isn't just any leftover chicken soup recipe-this is a flavor-packed bowl of Mexican chicken tortilla soup that'll have everyone going back for seconds. In just 30 minutes, you've got tender shredded chicken simmered in a zesty, savory broth, ready to be loaded up with all the toppings: crispy tortilla strips, creamy avocado, melty cheese, fresh herbs, and a squeeze of lime that ties it all together. It's bold, it's fun, and it's exactly what soup night needs.

    Mexican tortilla soup, ready to serve with garnishes in side bowls.

    If you love a good soup with chicken recipe, here's another one to fall in love with; a Mexican chicken soup. Plus, it's an easy tortilla soup recipe because of using leftover chicken and basic pantry ingredients. It's the most loved of many famous Mexican soup recipes for good reason.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love This Recipe

    • Uses leftover baked chicken or rotisserie chicken.
    • Big flavor, easy prep.
    • Customizable toppings.
    • Hearty with pinto beans.
    • Based on classic Mexican flavors everyone loves.

    For another chicken soup recipe, try this chicken vegetable soup. It's warming and comforting.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Ingredients for chicken tortilla soup on a counter, labeled.
    • Oil: Choose olive oil, avocado oil, or try this new healthy oil.
    • Onion: The aromatic backbone, yellow, brown, or white.
    • Carrot: My add for more color and flavor.
    • Celery: Part of flavor trio of onion, carrot and celery (mirepoix) for soup bases.
    • Chili pepper: If you like heat, go Jalapeño pepper. For little heat but good flavor, buy an Anaheim pepper. (See what one looks like in this post).
    • Garlic: Use fresh garlic cloves and finely chop or use a microplane zester. In a pinch, use granulated garlic powder.
    • Spices: Ground cumin, ground coriander, ground chipotle, and ancho chili powder that gives tortilla soup it gorgeous red color.
    • Herbs: Dried oregano and either fresh cilantro or fresh Italian parsley.
    • Diced tomatoes: Canned, fire roasted tomatoes, use the juices too.
    • Pinto beans: A traditional Mexican bean, use canned for speed.
    • Broth: Low sodium chicken broth or try turkey broth. Homemade chicken broth is easy and freezes. Rich broth equals rich flavor.
    • Chicken: Use leftover shredded baked chicken or rotisserie chicken.
    • Tortilla chips garnish: Two options, tortilla chips that are crushed a bit, or buy fresh tortillas and make homemade baked tortilla strips. Easy and so good. Recipe below.

    Pleas see recipe card for measurements.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Substitute Anaheim pepper (very mild) for Jalapeno pepper.
    • No fresh jalapeños? Use part or all of a small can of green chiles.
    • Substitute canned black beans for canned pinto beans, or small white beans.
    • Add corn kernels if you'd like for more color and texture.
    • Don't like cilantro? Use fresh chopped parsley as an alternative garnish.
    • If you can't find pure ancho chili powder use chili powder (which is a blend). Smoked paprika is another option for flavor and color.
    • Bell pepper is a terrific addition to chicken tortilla soup. Choose red, yellow or orange.

    Chef's Tip: Be careful when handling and chopping hot peppers. It protects your hands to wear disposable food handling gloves. Do not touch your eyes or face after handling fresh chilies and wash them well. The heat of peppers is in the inner membrane, the veins (or ribs) of the pepper, not the seeds.

    Recipe Instructions

    Vegetables for chicken soup sautéing in a Dutch oven.
    Step 1: Saute the onion, carrots, celery and jalapeno pepper in oil until soft. Add garlic.
    Vegetables and herbs cooking in a soup pot.
    Step 2: Add the herbs and spices to the pot and cook 2 minutes to release the flavors.
    Beans and vegetables cooking in a large heavy pot for tortilla soup.
    Step 3: Stir in the beans and tomatoes.
    Adding shredded chicken and broth to the pot to complete the soup.
    Step 4: Add the chicken and the broth.
    Richly colored  finished tortilla soup in a gray pot to serve.

    Homemade Tortilla Strips (optional)

    Crispy homemade baked tortilla strips on a baking sheet, for soup garnish.

    While you can use lightly crushed, fresh corn tortilla chips from a bag, these baked tortilla chips (or strips) are crisp and delicious. Make the homemade baked tortillas strips while you're working on the soup.

    Recipe Instructions (tortilla strips)

    Cut corn tortillas in half, then cut the halves crosswise into thin strips. Toss with a tiny bit of olive oil and bake at 350°F degrees on a sheet tray until golden and starting to crisp, about 15 minutes. Season with salt when you remove them from the oven.

    Close up of Mexican chicken soup in a white bowl, ready to eat with a spoon.

    Serving Suggestions

    The best part of chicken tortilla soup is the garnishes, allowing everyone to customize their soup. Goof garnish options include:

    • Lime wedges for fresh squeezed lime juice.
    • Chopped fresh cilantro (or parsley).
    • Sliced or diced avocado.
    • Grated cheese.
    • Fresh jalapeno slices.
    • A dollop of sour cream adds a nice cool tang.
    • Chopped green onions.
    • Thinly sliced or grated fresh radishes.
    • Wedges of refreshing limes.
    • And to top it all off, those crispy tortilla strips.

    Chicken tortilla soup is a meal in a bowl. You don't really need anything else to complete dinner. If you want to, add a tossed green salad with a citrusy vinaigrette. Make one with a lime olive oil like this.

    Leftovers and Freezing

    Leftovers keep 3-4 days in the refrigerator in an airtight container, labeled and dated. Can you freeze this soup? Yes, freeze it without any garnishes for 2-3 months.

    Thaw overnight in the refrigerator, and finish thawing and heating in a pot on the stovetop over low heat, covered, for best results. Then add fresh garnishes to serve.

    Recipe FAQs

    Is tortilla soup Mexican or American?

    Tortilla soup is definitely Mexican, in fact it's the most popular soup in Mexico. You'll find it on the menus of most Mexican restaurants. It's a traditional brothy soup with terrific flavors from spices common in Mexican cuisine. It's called Sopa de Tortilla in Spanish. It's also called Sopa Azteca (Aztec Soup).

    What is the difference between taco soup and tortilla soup?

    Tortilla soup is usually lighter and more brothy than taco soup. Taco soup often uses ground beef and is sort of between a tortilla soup and chili in texture. Both recipes utilize traditional Mexican ingredients and spices.

    More Mexican-Inspired Recipes

    Need more fiesta flavors? Another Mexican inspired recipe that's quick and easy if this super easy taco meat filling recipe. And be sure to make a jar of my homemade taco seasoning blend. It works for more than tacos.

    • chicken tomatillo soup
      Tomatillo Soup (with Chicken or Turkey)
    • Sliced flank steak on a cutting board with flank steak marinade in a small bowl.
      Carne Asada Marinade (for Grilled Steak)
    • tomatillo salsa verde
      Tomatillo Salsa Recipe
    • A gray platter of sals verde chicken breasts with tomatillo sauce, grated cheese and chopped cilantro.
      Easy Salsa Verde Chicken (green salsa chicken)

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make Chicken Tortilla Soup, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers. If you had an issue with it, let me help you figure it out.

    📖 Recipe

    Close up of Mexican chicken soup in a white bowl.

    Chicken Tortilla Soup

    Sally Cameron
    Leftover roast chicken makes this soup fast to put together. It's a meal in a bowl. Have fun customizing your soup with the garnishes. Use leftovers from a whole chicken or chicken breasts. A market roasted chicken will work as well. Don't let the list of ingredients concern you. A lot of it is spices, garnishes and options. 
    4.75 from 4 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 15 minutes mins
    Total Time 30 minutes mins
    Course Soup
    Cuisine Mexican
    Servings 4
    Calories 243 kcal

    Equipment

    • 5 quart heavy pan or Dutch Oven
    • Rimmed baking sheet

    Ingredients
      

    Tortilla Soup

    • 1 tablespoon olive oil
    • ½ medium onion 1 cup chopped
    • 1 large carrot ½ cup chopped
    • 1 large celery rib ½ cup chopped
    • 1 small jalapeño pepper or Anaheim for mild heat
    • 3 large garlic cloves chopped fine or zested
    • 1 tablespoon ground cumin
    • 1 ½ teaspoons ground coriander optional but good
    • 1 teaspoon ancho chili powder
    • 1 teaspoon dried oregano
    • ½ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
    • ¼ teaspoon ground chipotle powder optional for spicy soup
    • 1 15-ounce can diced tomatoes not drained
    • 1 15-ounce can pinto beans rinsed and drained
    • 5 cups chicken or turkey broth
    • 9 ounces cooked shredded chicken about 2 ¾ cups

    Tortilla Strips (optional)

    • 8 small corn tortillas for strips, make ahead, directions below
    • ½ teaspoon olive oil to make tortilla strips
    • salt

    More Garnishes (optional)

    • 4 ounces grated Jack or Mexican cheese blend
    • 1-2 limes quartered
    • 2 tablespoons fresh chopped cilantro or parsley
    • 1 large avocado sliced, diced or mashed
    • 2 radishes thinly sliced
    • 1 jalapeno sliced

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Crispy Tortilla Strips

    • Pre-heat the oven to 350°F degrees. Line a rimmed baking sheet with foil. Cut tortillas in half, then crosswise into thin strips. Toss with 1-2 teaspoons of olive oil. Bake strips 12-15 minutes or until crisp and golden. Watch so they don't burn.
      Timing depends on whether your oven is convection or not; convection is a little faster. Directly after removing from the oven, sprinkle with sea salt. They will crisp a bit more as they cool.

    Chicken Tortilla Soup

    • If not already done, chop the onion, carrot and celery into small pieces. Slice off the top of the jalapeno, then lengthwise into quarters. Scrap out the seeds and the inner membrane if you want to reduce the heat. Chop the pepper small.
    • In a 5 quart pot or Dutch oven, heat the oil over medium heat. Add the onion, carrot, celery and jalapeño and cook until the vegetables are soft, about 5 minutes. If they start to brown, turn your heat down. Add the garlic and cook 1 minute.
    • Add the spices, oregano, salt and pepper and cook 2 minutes to release the flavors. Add the tomatoes, beans, broth and chicken and heat through, about 10 minutes. Serve with garnishes on the side or on top.

    Notes

    Nutrition label is calculated without the optional garnishes.
    Be careful when handling and chopping hot peppers. It protects your hands to wear disposable food handling gloves. Do not touch your eyes or face after handling chilies.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 243kcalCarbohydrates: 10gProtein: 20gFat: 15gSaturated Fat: 3gCholesterol: 43mgSodium: 431mgPotassium: 477mgFiber: 2gSugar: 2gVitamin A: 2813IUVitamin C: 8mgCalcium: 59mgIron: 3mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Lemongrass Chicken Recipe

    08/20/2013 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

    Lemongrass Chicken

    Take a trip to the orient with this lemongrass chicken recipe. One of the most important flavors in Southeast Asian cooking, aromatic lemongrass gives this roast chicken a bright, citrusy flavor with a hint of ginger. Marinate chicken breasts for a few hours or overnight, then roast and serve. Extra chicken makes a great chicken salad.

    Lemongrass chiciken

    Lemongrass Chicken Recipe Highlights

    If you come across lemongrass in the produce department or at an Asian market but did not know what it was, let me encourage you to try it and bring some home. It's used in soups, stir-fry's, marinades, teas and curries.

    Lemongrass is a grass that is used like an herb. It is thin and stiff, kind of spiky, with a scallion-like base. The stalk has layers wrapped around a tight central core. For cooking, use the lower part of the stalk, not the skinny top (if there is one).

    Thai Lemongrass Chicken|AFoodCentricLife.com
    Lemongrass finely zested with a microplane (tool).

    How to Buy Lemongrass

    Depending on where you buy lemongrass, you may need to start by peeling off a tough layer of the outer grass to get to the paler, softer inside.  Some stores do this for you. Some sell it in a more natural state. Buy fresh-looking stalks that are a bit moist, not dried out, yellowed, browned or withered.

    Thai Lemongrass Chicken Marinade

    For this recipe, I've created a quick and easy marinade for the chicken. Combine finely zested lemongrass with ginger, Tamari (wheat-free soy sauce), garlic, shallot, coconut oil and lime juice. I've also added the Vietnamese fish sauce, nuoc mam.

    If you have never used fish sauce, you will find it in the Asian section of your market and online. If you didn't grow up with this foundational Asian ingredient, one whif might send you running. It can have a strong fish smell. But don't let that deter you from using it. It gives great dept of savory flavor to this marinade and does not taste fishy when mixed in.

    The brand I buy is Red Boat. It is all natural, does not contain preservatives or MSG, and is first pressed like extra virgin olive oil.

    How to trim chicken breasts
    Preparing bone-in chicken breasts for cooking.

    How to Prepare Chicken Breasts

    To prepare chicken breasts, trim the side ribs and excess fat, make marinade and combine in a ziploc bag. Marinate over night in the refrigerator if you have time, or at least a few hours. Drain chicken, discard marinade, and roast the chicken.

    Zest Versus Chop

    Many recipes will tell you to chop lemongrass. It is much easier to use a microplane zester. You get very finely grated lemongrass versus woody chunks. One stalk should give you enough for this recipe, about 3 tablespoons. With the extra stalks, zest finely then freeze. Then it is ready to add to others recipes at a moment's notice.

    Lemongrass Chicken
    Lemongrass Chicken on a platter with knife and fork on a grey wood table.

    More Ideas for Cooking with Lemongrass

    • Try adding lemongrass to chicken soup for a fresh, new flavor. Add either the fine zest or try 2″ pieces, crushed first to release the flavor while cooking. Remove pieces before serving.
    • Add zest to chicken salad
    • Use this marinade for Thai grilled shrimp. Marinate the shrimp 30-45 minutes at room temperature, skewer and grill until done. Serve with rice.
    • Add the zest to a ginger stir-fry at the end before serving, along with some chopped fresh cilantro.
    • Allow pieces to steep with tea and served either hot or chilled for a refreshing iced tea.

    📖 Recipe

    Lemongrass Chicken

    Lemongrass Chicken Recipe

    Sally Cameron
    With a bright citrusy flavor with a hint of ginger, lemongrass is truly a grass that is used like an herb. It's central to Thai, Vietnamese and other Southeast Asian, and Indian cuisines. Here, it adds great flavor to a chicken marinade. For fine zest, use a microplane zester. Fish sauce is available in the Asian section of your market. I've listed it as optional, but it lends a great depth of flavor. Shred any leftover chicken for chicken salad and use lemongrass for fresh flavor.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 2 hours hrs
    Cook Time 30 minutes mins
    Total Time 2 hours hrs 30 minutes mins
    Course Chicken, Dinner, Entree
    Cuisine Asian, Thai
    Servings 6 servings
    Calories 292 kcal

    Equipment

    • Cast iron or stainless steel skillet/fry pan

    Ingredients
      

    • 4 pounds bone-in chicken breasts preferably organic
    • 3 tablespoons fine lemongrass zest about 1 stalk lemongrass
    • 1 medium shallot chopped fine
    • 3 large garlic cloves chopped or zested fine
    • 1 tablespoon low-sodium Tamari or coconut aminos for soy-free
    • 1 tablespoon agave or use liquid stevia drops
    • 2 tablespoons Asian fish sauce preferably Red Boat brand
    • 1 pinch red pepper flakes if you like heat, optional
    • 3 tablespoons plus 1 tablespoon coconut oil for the pan
    • 2 tablespoons fresh chopped cilantro or flat leaf parsley
    • 1 tablespoon ginger puree or finely zested fresh ginger
    • 1 lime juiced

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Marinate chicken

    • Combine all of the rest of the ingredients (reserving 1 tablespoon oil for the pan) in a bowl or large measuring cup and whisk together. Pour into a zip bag with chicken, squeeze out air and seal. Refrigerate overnight or for 2 hours (as long as you can). Drain and discard marinade.

    Trim chicken

    • Pre-heat oven to 375°F. Prepare a rimmed baking sheet with parchment or foil. Trim chicken breasts of any little rib bones and any excess fat. For an example of how to prep, see the photo in the post.

    Sear chicken

    • Heat a large stainless steel or cast iron fry pan, saute pan or skillet over medium heat. Add the reserved 2 teaspoons coconut oil to the pan. Sear chicken breasts skin-side down until golden. Turn chicken and cook for another 1-2 minutes. .

    Roast chicken

    • Remove chicken breasts to the rimmed baking sheet and roast in the oven until a digital thermometer reaches 160-165 degrees, 30-35 minutes depending on your oven.

    Notes

    Depending on where you buy lemongrass, you may need to start by peeling off a tough layer of the outer grass to get to the paler, softer inside.  Some stores do this for you. Some sell it in a more natural state. Buy fresh-looking stalks that are a bit moist, not dried out, yellowed, browned or withered.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 292kcalCarbohydrates: 6gProtein: 26gFat: 18gSaturated Fat: 9gPolyunsaturated Fat: 3gMonounsaturated Fat: 5gTrans Fat: 0.1gCholesterol: 77mgSodium: 645mgPotassium: 347mgFiber: 1gSugar: 3gVitamin A: 121IUVitamin C: 5mgCalcium: 27mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Baked Turkey Meatballs

    03/05/2023 by Sally Cameron 15 Comments

    Close up of savory meatballs with garlic, butter, olive oil sauce with herbs..

    Whip up a batch of classic comfort food with this easy, step-by-step guide to the best baked turkey meatballs. These versatile, budget-friendly meatballs are gluten-free and perfect for meal prep, freezing, or serving as bite-sized cocktail appetizers. Enjoy them over noodles, with your favorite sauce, or simply on their own. Baked in the oven-no messy stovetop browning required-they're simple, satisfying, and full of flavor. Ready for a delicious dinner? Let's get started!

    Turkey meatballs in a butter, olive oil, garlic sauce in a white dish with parsley.

    Looking for a change of pace? If you usually make beef meatballs or pork meatballs, give these ground turkey meatballs a try. They're lighter but still full of flavor-and it's easy to double the recipe and freeze extras for quick, future meals.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Baked Turkey Meatballs Highlights

    • Lean and healthy - Ground turkey is a lean, high-protein choice.
    • Meal prep friendly - Turkey meatballs are great for meal prep.
    • Budget friendly - Ground meat is easy on the wallet.
    • Variable - Make them gluten-free or not.
    • Easy to make - Baking meatballs is easier than stovetop.

    If you love meatballs, try this meatball beef stroganoff recipe, and you can make the meatballs to be used with other sauces.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Prepped ingredients for meatballs on a sheet tray, ready to start.
    • Ground turkey: Choose 93% lean ground turkey for juicy turkey meatballs.
    • Breadcrumbs: Breadcrumbs are a binding agent for meatballs, use gluten-free or wheat. Here's a link for making homemade homemade breadcrumbs.
    • Milk: Milk is used to soak the breadcrumbs forming a paste called a panade (pah-nod), a traditional type of binder for meatballs. It lightens the meatballs.
    • Egg: Another binding agent helping meatballs hold together and retain their shape.
    • Fresh herbs: Fresh parsley adds garden flavor and color.
    • Dried herbs: Dried oregano or Italian seasoning blend works for more flavor. Dried herbs are more concentrated than fresh herbs so you use less.
    • Onion: For moist and flavorful, not bland, turkey meatballs. Yellow, brown, white, or even red onion work.
    • Parmesan: Use finely grated or ground Parmesan cheese. It's good for topping the meatballs when you serve as well. It adds a salty, savory flavor umami flavor.
    • Garlic: The aromatic companion to onion. See my tip on zesting below.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt, pepper, and red pepper.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Swap for ground turkey: If your store does not have 93% lean ground turkey, you have options. You can still make terrific baked turkey meatballs with 99% ground turkey by adding 1 tablespoons of olive oil. or substitute ground chicken (93%) or lean ground beef (7%-10%). That fat to lean ratio is up to your preference.
    • If you can't do eggs, use a chia egg to help bind, it works great. Use 1 tablespoon chia seeds + 3 tablespoons water. Let it gel for a few minutes, then add.

    Need another recipe using ground turkey? Try these turkey and quinoa stuffed peppers or turkey meatloaf with Mexican flavors.

    How to Make Baked Turkey Meatballs

    How do I cook turkey meatballs in the oven? Bake them on a rimmed baking sheet or cookie sheet lined with baking parchment for easier clean-up. A quick spray of non-stick on the parchment helps too. The steps are below.

    Step 1: Pre-heat the oven to 375 degrees F.

    Turkey meat with ingredients for meatballs.
    Step 2: Add herbs, onion, egg and meat to a medium bowl.
    Finished meat muxture in a glass bowl, ready to roll into balls.
    Step 3: Add the rest of the ingredients and mix gently and get ready to roll into balls.
    Using a microplane zester tool for fine garlic that melts into a recipe.

    Chef's tip: Gently mix meat with your hands. Wear disposable gloves or give your hands a quick spray of oil. Don't squish or over-mix the meat for tender meatballs.

    Portioning turkey meatball mix into balls with a cookie scoop onto a baking sheet.
    Step 4: Portion meatball mix, roll into balls, and place in a single layer.

    Chef's tip for perfect meatballs: Use a cool little tool called a disher or a cookies scoop. The perfect size for bite-sized meatballs is either the #40 or the size #50. Buy them online or at a restaurant supply. Alternatively, use a rounded tablespoon for an approximately 1 ¼"meatball.

    Rolled meatballs on a rimmed baking sheet with parchment for oven baking.
    Step 5: Bake meatballs in the oven until a digital instant-read thermometer inserted into the center reads to an internal temperature 165°F. The baking time is short, 15-18 minutes. Remove from the oven for serving or cool to freeze.

    Chef's Tip on working with meat: Wearing disposable food handling gloves makes mixing the meat easier. Alternatively, wet hands with a little water or a quick spray of non-stick like this one. This applies when rolling the meatballs too.

    Meatball Serving Suggestions

    Serve meatballs as a main dish for dinner or as an appetizer for cocktail meatballs (with toothpicks) for watching your weekend games. They are terrific for a potluck. I've made triple batches of them and watched them disappear!

    Baked turkey meatballs with red marinara sauce in a cast iron skillet.

    What goes good with meatballs for sauce? While marinara is delicious, there are other terrific options for sauce. Some sauces work better as dipping sauces served on the side.

    • Tomato marinara sauce or tomato sauce is traditional but there are other options. Here's a great sauce for meatballs, my quick and easy homemade marinara.
    • Make a simple garlic olive oil butter sauce: Mix half melted butter with half extra virgin olive oil and either a little garlic powder or finely chopped (zested) fresh garlic clove. Add some fresh chopped parsley for color. It's light and tasty. Smear the chopped garlic into a paste with the back of your knife before adding.
    • Try an Asian-inspired sauce like sweet-sour Hoisin sauce, either homemade or bottled, or try teriyaki.
    • Your favorite barbecue sauce is another good option for dipping.
    A close up of meatballs in a shallow white casserole dish with a buttery garlic sauce.

    What to Serve With Meatballs

    Of course pasta is classic with meatballs, but if you want to change it up try these options:

    • Zucchini noodles.
    • Add to a baked spaghetti squash.
    • Creamy polenta or grits.
    • Rice.
    • Creamy mashed potatoes.
    • Cauliflower rice with herbs.
    • Creamy cauliflower puree.
    • Serve them on their own in a bowl with sauce, with a side of green vegetables.
    • For a classic spaghetti dinner sprinkled with Parmesan cheese.

    Turkey Meatballs as a Party Appetizer

    When serving my baked turkey meatballs as an appetizer for parties, here is my Buffalo Butter Sauce recipe: Mix ½ cup Franks RedHot Original Sauce, 4 tablespoons unsalted butter, 2 tablespoons brown sugar, 2 teaspoons apple cider vinegar, and a pinch of garlic powder, onion powder, and smoked paprika (optional), heat until the butter is melted and the sauce is hot and serve with the meatballs. Make ¾ cup, doubles easy!

    Storing and Freezing

    I freeze meatballs all of the time, and they thaw great for a fast dinner. Freeze them fully cooked in a single layer, then transfer to a freezer-safe bag. Reheat in the oven or simmer in sauce straight from frozen. They last about 3 months frozen, be sure to label and date.

    Recipe FAQs

    How do you keep turkey meatballs from drying out?

    Ground turkey is lean, so moisture is key. Buy the 93%/7% and sip the 99% lean ground turkey. Use ingredients like grated onion and eggs to help keep them juicy. Other adds for moisture are milk, and cheese, Don't over-bake-check for doneness at 165°F internal temp. They bake faster than you might think - in 15-17 minutes.

    Can I make these meatballs ahead of time?

    Yes! You can mix and shape meatballs a day ahead and store them covered in the fridge. Or bake and reheat later-just keep them in an airtight container for up to 4 days, or freeze for longer.

    Can I make them without regular breadcrumbs?

    For gluten-free, use gluten-free breadcrumbs, almond flour, or even rolled oats. Just make sure there's enough binder (like egg) to hold them together.

    More Recipes With Ground Meat

    Ground meat, whether turkey, beef, or chicken, are affordalbe and easy to keep on hand. Try these recipes with ground meat

    • Colorful baked ground turkey stuffed peppers with quinoa and herbs.
      Ground Turkey Stuffed Peppers
    • Taco meat in a cast iron pan with fixings for tacos around it.
      Ground Meat Taco Recipe
    • Ground turkey lettuce wraps with lettuce leaves.
      Ground Turkey Lettuce Wraps
    • bison bolognese with pasta
      Bison Bolognese(Ground Bison Meat Sauce)

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this baked turkey meatball recipe, please add your comment. I enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers. If you had a question, comment and I will help you.

    📖 Recipe

    Close up of savory meatballs with garlic, butter, olive oil sauce with herbs..

    Baked Turkey Meatballs

    Sally Cameron
    Classic comfort food made lighter with ground turkey. Many ways to serve, see suggestions at the end, how to roll perfect meatballs. Garnish with extra sprinkles of grated Parmesan and fresh chopped herbs if desired. Yield is approximately 32 meatballs with a serving of 6 per person.
    5 from 4 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 30 minutes mins
    Cook Time 15 minutes mins
    Total Time 45 minutes mins
    Course Appetizer, Dinner, Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Servings 5 servings
    Calories 224 kcal

    Equipment

    • Rimmed baking sheet
    • Cookie scoop or disher, #40 or #50 or a 1 tablespoon measure
    • Baking parchment or foil

    Ingredients
      

    • 6 tablespoons Plain or Italian breadcrumbs (2 ounces) GF or wheat, packaged
    • 6 tablespoons milk
    • ½ cup finely chopped onion
    • ¼ cup finely grated or ground Parmesan
    • 1 large egg
    • 2 tablespoons finely chopped fresh Italian parsley
    • 1 ½ teaspoons dried oregano or Italian seasoning blend
    • 3 cloves garlic finely chopped or finely zested
    • ½ teaspoon sea or kosher salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
    • ⅛ teaspoon red chile pepper
    • 1 pound ground turkey I make them with 93% lean ground turkey

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Set up

    • Pre-heat your oven to 375°F. Line a rimmed baking sheet (half sheet size) with parchment or foil and a quick spray of non-stick or oil spray for easier clean-up.

    Blend Meatball Mix

    • First, add the breadcrumbs and milk together in a small bowl and allow them to stand for 2 minutes. While they are soaking, add the rest of the ingredients to a medium bowl and stir. Mix in the soaked breadcrumbs, then the the ground turkey.
      Gently mix the meat with your hands until fully combined. Use either food handler gloves or lightly oil or spray your hands. As your hands get sticky, wipe them off and re-spray, then complete rolling the meatballs.

    Rolling Meatballs

    • Using a disher (see note at end) or a generous tablespoon full, gently roll the portions into round balls and place them onto the sheet pan. Meatballs should be about 1 ¼″ in diameter (almost 1 ounce).

    Bake Meatballs

    • Bake for approximately 15-18 minutes or until a digital thermometer reads 165°F in the center.

    Add Sauce and Serve

    • Serve with your sauce of choice, alone, or over one of the suggestions below.

    Notes

    • To portion meatballs equally, use a small cookie scoop also called a disher. The perfect size cookie scoop for bite-sized meatballs is either the #40 or the size #50. Buy them online or at a restaurant supply. Using one is the fastest way to make meatballs. 
    • The recipe yield is approximately 30 meatballs for the #50 size. 
    • To serve: try meatballs over polenta, pasta, zucchini noodles, baked spaghetti squash, cauliflower rice, cauliflower puree, served alone in a bowl, or as an appetizer with toothpicks.
    • To get the garlic fine, use a microplane zester.
    • For larger meatballs: If you want to make them larger you can. Sizing in dishers is the opposite of what you'd think. The smaller the number, the larger the size. Adjust your baking time.
    • The sauce in the photo lead photo is 4 T unsalted butter, 4 T olive oil, 1 finely chopped or zested garlic clove (or sub powdered garlic) and chopped parsley. Melt together and stir.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 224kcalCarbohydrates: 18gProtein: 27gFat: 5gSaturated Fat: 2gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 1gTrans Fat: 0.02gCholesterol: 94mgSodium: 389mgPotassium: 366mgFiber: 1gSugar: 2gVitamin A: 296IUVitamin C: 4mgCalcium: 94mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Spinach Stuffed Mushrooms With Parmesan Cheese

    11/21/2024 by Sally Cameron 3 Comments

    Spinach stuffed mushrooms on a gray serving plate with melted parmesan on top, with parsley.

    Spinach stuffed mushrooms are the perfect appetizer for hungry guests while dinner is on the way and holiday parties. Packed with spinach, Parmesan cheese, sun-dried tomatoes, garlic, and herbs, these mushrooms deliver a rich, savory flavor in every bite. Prep them ahead and bake them when it's time to serve. These stuffed mushrooms are a crowd pleaser. 

    Spinach stuffed mushrooms with sun-dried tomatoes, herbs, and parmesan cheese on a gray platter.

    Ideal as a starter for holiday meals or a great option as a game-day appetizer, spinach stuffed mushrooms are delicious. Savory, cheesy, warm, and satisfying. Just enough to take the edge off but not fill you up before dinner. Never made them? See my step-by-step instructions for the best stuffed mushrooms. They're a good thing to add to your appetizers recipe file.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • Make them for holidays and game-days, they're versatile.
    • Satisfying flavors, a hearty appetizer.
    • Make them ahead, bake to serve.
    • Great to take to a holiday pot-luck!

    If you love mushrooms and pasta, try this mushroom pasta sauce. It's rich and hearty!

    Recipe Ingredients

    Ingredients for spinach stuffed mushrooms in prep bowls on the counter.
    • Mushrooms: Buy white mushrooms 2″ across. You need large mushrooms as they shrink during baking. Hand pick them for a uniform size. Skip the shrink wrapped packages if possible as mushrooms may be different sizes. Brown mushrooms, also called cremini or baby bella mushrooms are good too.
    • Spinach: Frozen chopped spinach leaves.
    • Oil: Extra virgin olive oil for best flavor or avocado oil.
    • Shallot: The more delicate member of the onion family with a nice mild flavor.
    • Garlic: Fresh cloves for best flavor, or garlic powder if not fresh is available.
    • Sundried tomatoes: Buy them packed in olive oil.
    • White wine: Amplifies flavors and is mostly cooked off, optional.
    • Fresh herbs: Italian parsley. 
    • Dried herbs: Italian seasoning, dried oregano, or dried thyme. 
    • Cheese: Savory, salty, grated Parmesan cheese. Get the good stuff.
    • Spice: For a little kick, add red pepper flakes or cayenne pepper. Optional.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt and black pepper. 

    Substitutions and Variations

    • If you can't get shallots, use finely chopped onion.
    • If there's no fresh oregano, use dried oregano, fresh marjoram, or an Italian blend.
    • For vegan diners or those who eat dairy-free, use a vegan parmesan.
    • Swap parmesan for Asiago, Grana Padano, or Pecorino Romano cheese. or combine them for more flavor.
    • Add a link or two of finely ground chicken sausage. I use Applegate Sweet Italian links. Pulse it fine in a food processor and add to the cooked filling as it's pre-cooked. You might need a few extra mushrooms.
    • Swap dry sherry for the white wine.

    This one pan Italian chicken thighs recipe has lots of mushrooms in the sauce.

    mushrooms

    Chef's tip for buying mushrooms: Buy mushrooms with closed stems, where the gills are not exposed. That is the sign of a fresh mushroom. Also, choose mushrooms with no brown spots, that are firm, white and not shriveled.

    For another mushroom appetizer, try this classic French mushroom duxelles recipe served with crostini.

    Recipe Instructions

    Ready a lined baking sheet with foil or parchment paper (if broiling, use foil).

    Hands holding mushrooms under a trickle of water to rinse them.
    Step 1: Clean mushrooms under a trickle of cold water or with damp paper towels.
    Mushrooms laying top top with stems removed for filling on a cutting board.
    Step 2: Pop out the mushroom stems and save for filling, roughly chop.
    Large mushrooms without stems top down on a foil lined baking sheet for baking.
    Step 3: Place mushroom caps top down on an aluminum foil lined rimmed baking sheet, drizzle with oil, sprinkle with salt and pepper. 
    Dark brown baked mushroom caps ready to be filled with stuffing.
    Step 4: Broil mushrooms for 5-7 minutes until browned and juices release.
    Chopped shallot and garlic in small glass prep bowls on white cutting board.
    Step 5: While mushrooms are broiling, chop shallot, garlic and anything else needed.
    Cooking shopped mushroom, shallot and garlic in a stainless steel saute pan.
    Step 6: In a saute pan over medium heat cook chopped stems, shallot, and garlic in butter until soft. Add wine and cook off.
    Cooking filling for spinach stuffed mushrooms in a stainless saute pan.
    Step 7: Add the sun-dried tomatoes, chopped spinach, and Italian seasoning. Stir and cook for a few minutes till blended. 
    Glass bowl of cooked stuffed mushrooms filling with spinach, sun-dried tomatoes, and parmesan cheese.
    Step 8: Add stuffing mixture to a medium bowl, mix with parmesan and parsley. 
    Spinach stuffed mushrooms on a baking tray with a bowl of filling and parmesan on side.
    Step 9: Stuff mushrooms with a spoonful of the spinach mixture, mounding gently and pinching it together with your fingers to make it hold.
    Baked stuffed  mushrooms topped with parmesan cheese on a baking tray.
    Step 10: Sprinkle with extra parmesan and broil or bake in the oven or air fryer until hot and cheese starts to melt.

    Serving and Storage

    Serve spinach stuffed mushrooms hot or at room temperature with a little extra sprinkle of parmesan if desired. If making a few hours ahead, cover and refrigerate until guests arrive, then bake and serve in a preheated oven. Serve stuffed mushrooms alone or as part of a larger appetizer spread. If you have extra filling, it's great folded into an omelet!

    For leftover stuffed mushrooms, keep in an airtight container and enjoy within a day. Reheat in the microwave or oven. They last longer than that but will get soft.

    Chef's tip for filling stuffed mushrooms: For evenly mounded and portioned stuffed mushrooms, I use a tool called a disher in the #2050 size, also called a cookie scoop. You can also use a tablespoon. I have dishers in many sizes. They come in handy for portioning out all kinds of ingredients.

    Spinach stuffed mushrooms on a gray serving plate with melted parmesan on top, with parsley.

    Recipe FAQs

    What can I substitute for Parmesan cheese?

    Instead of Parmesan use Spanish Manchego, or other Italian cheese such as Pecorino Romano, Asiago, or Grana Padano.

    How do I prevent stuffed mushrooms from getting soggy?

    Don't get them too wet while cleaning. Wipe with a damp paper towel or rinse quickly under a slow trickle of cold water while rubbing 2-3 mushrooms in your hands, then dry. Additionally, you want moist filling that will hold together but not wet.

    How do I keep the filling from falling out?

    Don't overload the stuffing and pile it too high. A good tool to help evenly portion and fill stuffed mushrooms is a very small cookie scoop, also called a disher. Be sure too that your stuffing is moist enough to hold together and pinch it together with your fingers into a little mound so it holds.

    Can I add meat to the filling?

    Yes, I find that finely chopped cooked sausage is a great addition. I use cooked sausage links and finely grind it in my food processor. Crisply cooked and crumbled bacon is good too.

    More Appetizer Recipes

    If you love mushrooms, try some of these delicious recipes with mushrooms. And for another stuffed mushroom recipe, try these stuffed portobello mushrooms.

    • steakhouse roasted mushrooms
      Sauteed Mushrooms and Onions
    • A gray bowl of chunky leek mushroom soup with a spoon beside bowl.
      Creamy Leek and Mushroom Soup Recipe
    • stuffed portobello mushrooms with goat cheese and tomatoes
      Stuffed Portobello Mushrooms
    • mushroom marinara pasta sauce
      Mushroom Tomato Sauce

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make these spinach stuffed mushrooms, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    Originally published 11-5-2013, now updated.

    📖 Recipe

    Spinach stuffed mushrooms on a gray serving plate with melted parmesan on top, with parsley.

    Spinach Stuffed Mushrooms

    Sally Cameron
    Spinach stuffed mushrooms with sun-dried tomatoes make great party and game-day snacks too. Make them ahead a few hours ahead, then broil or bake to serve hot. For dairy-free use a vegan parmesan cheese.
    5 from 2 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 20 minutes mins
    Cook Time 30 minutes mins
    Total Time 50 minutes mins
    Course Appetizer
    Cuisine American
    Servings 7 2 per person
    Calories 206 kcal

    Equipment

    • Rimmed baking sheet
    • Baking parchment optional
    • saute pan

    Ingredients
      

    • 8 ounces frozen chopped spinach
    • 14 large white mushrooms 2″ across
    • 2 teaspoons olive oil
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
    • 1 tablespoon unsalted butter or salted, or use olive oil.
    • ½ cup finely chopped shallot 1 large
    • 3 large garlic cloves, finely chopped sub ½ teaspoon garlic powder
    • 2 tablespoons dry white wine or dry sherry, optional
    • ¼ cup oil-packed sun-dried tomatoes drained well and finely chopped
    • 2 tablespoons fresh chopped parsley leaves
    • 1 teaspoon dried Italian seasoning blend
    • ½ cup + 2 tablespoons finely grated Parmesan divided use

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Prep spinach

    • Cook spinach according to package directions in the microwave. Drain water then place in layers of paper towels and squeeze dry over the sink. Finely chop the spinach.

    Clean mushrooms

    • Wipe mushrooms clean with a damp paper towel. Alternatively, under a trickle of cold running water, cup 2 mushrooms at a time in your hands. Quickly run them under the water, gently rubbing the mushrooms to remove any debris. Dry with paper towels. Pop out the stems by gently pushing them from side to side, leaving a hollow center. Roughly chop stems or briefly pulse in a food processor.

    Broil mushrooms

    • Pre-heat broiler. Set rack one level down from the top. Place mushrooms hollow side up on a rimmed baking sheet in a single layer. Drizzle mushrooms with 2 teaspoons of oil and sprinkle with a little salt and pepper. Broil mushrooms 5-7 minutes until they are browned and have given off their liquid.
      When done, drain and place on a clean rimmed baking sheet or in a broiler-safe casserole dish. Discard the juices.
      Note: You can also make the filling ahead of time, then stuff mushrooms without broiling first and baking them a little longer until browned and hot all the way through.

    Cook the filling

    • In a medium saute or fry pan, melt butter over medium heat. Add mushroom stems and cook until moisture evaporates and they are browned, 1-2 minutes.
      Add shallot and cooking and stirring until softened about 2 minutes. Add garlic and cook 1 more minute. Add wine if using and cook until almost gone. Stir in sun-dried tomatoes, spinach, and Italian seasoning, plus salt and pepper. Cook about 2 minutes to blend flavors.
      Remove the filling to a bowl and stir in ½ cup of the parmesan cheese.

    Stuff the mushrooms

    • Taste filing and add any additional salt and pepper. With a tablespoon or #50 disher (scooper), fill the center of the mushrooms, mounding filling and pinching with your fingers to hold together.

    Bake or broil to finish

    • Pre-heat oven to 350°F. Place filled mushrooms on foil-lined rimmed baking sheet or in a shallow casserole dish. Sprinkle with the last 2 tablespoons of Parmesan. Bake until heated hot, 10-15 minutes. Alternatively broil the mushroom until browned and hot.

    Notes

    Mushrooms can be made a few hours ahead, covered and refrigerated. Remove from the refrigerator about 30 minutes prior to baking or broiling to get the chill off, then bake or broil and serve hot.
    You can also make the filling ahead of time, then stuff mushrooms without broiling first and baking them a little longer until hot all the way through.
    Here is the link to the #50 disher (cookie scoop) I use to portion the filling
     
     

    Nutrition

    Serving: 2Calories: 206kcalCarbohydrates: 12gProtein: 11gFat: 13gSaturated Fat: 6gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 5gTrans Fat: 0.1gCholesterol: 26mgSodium: 575mgPotassium: 507mgFiber: 3gSugar: 3gVitamin A: 4882IUVitamin C: 12mgCalcium: 289mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Scallops with White Wine Sauce

    05/28/2014 by Sally Cameron 3 Comments

    Seared scallops with white wine

    Scallops in white wine sauce are a simple yet elegant dinner that comes together in minutes. Big sea scallops, also known as diver scallops, are a true seafood delicacy-tender, buttery, and perfect for pairing with a light, flavorful sauce. With the right technique and pan, you can achieve a golden, restaurant-quality sear at home. Let me show you how to make this easy, impressive dish that you'll make again and again.

    Golden seared scallops in a non-stick pan, ready to serve.

    Scallops are naturally sweet and tender, and when seared properly, they develop a beautiful golden crust while staying buttery inside. The white wine sauce adds a light, flavorful touch, enhancing the dish without overpowering the delicate scallops. Best of all, this recipe comes together in minutes, making it perfect for both weeknight meals and special occasions. Serve with crusty bread, pasta, rice, and a simple salad to complete the meal.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • Searing scallops is easy.
    • It's a fast recipe.
    • The white wine sauce is terrific and this technique lends itself to other sauces.

    For another easy scallops dish try this scallops with vegetable and pasta or scallops with Hoisin glaze.

    Recipe Ingredients

    • Scallops: Buy the biggest scallops you can, often called dry or dry-packed scallops. Buy by weight or by piece. Frozen scallops work too, but they must be thawed then thoroughly patted dry before cooking for a good sear.
    • White wine: Buy dry white wine such as a chardonnay or sauvignon blanc. I use the small airline-sized bottles to cook with.
    • Butter: Use unsalted butter for control.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt and pepper.

    Chef's tip on buying scallops: When purchasing scallops choose "dry" scallops and ask if they have been treated. Avoid scallops treated with a phosphate solution. A brilliant white color is often a giveaway. Not only do you pay for water weight, they don't taste as good or brown as well. Scallops should smell fresh and clean like the ocean, not fishy. If fresh or thawed, scallops are best cooked within a day of purchase.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • No wine? Use low-sodium chicken broth or water plus a squeeze of lemon juice.
    • To make dairy free, swap butter with olive oil for a lighter option or ghee for extra richness, or use a non-dairy butter.
    • Add fresh finely chopped thyme, parsley, or chives for a bright, aromatic finish.
    • For a citrus twist, add lemon zest or orange zest for a flavor contrast.
    • For a creamy white wine sauce, stir in a splash of heavy cream or crème fraîche for a richer texture.

    For another scallops recipes, try these scallops wrapped in prosciutto and grilled.

    The first step of searing scallops, top side down in a pan.

    Recipe Instructions

    Prep Work

    A good non-stick pan makes searing scallops easy. Check your non-stick pan before using, because if it's scratched and the coating is flaking, it's not safe to use. Toss it and invest in a new one, a non-toxic one.

    Unwrap the scallops and allow them to sit on the counter for about 30 minutes to get the chill off. Check to see if the abductor muscle (the ''foot") is still attached. If it is, remove it. It's chewy and not nice to eat. Some stores remove it for you. Dry the scallops with a paper towel.

    Turn the scallops over, add wine, they finish quickly.

    Searing Scallops

    Sprinkle the scallops sea salt and black pepper. Add a teaspoon of oil and heat the pan over medium heat until hot. Place the scallops in a single layer in the pan and don't crowd them. They should sizzle when they hit the pan which tells you the pan is hot enough.

    Allow a golden crust to form. This will take a few minutes. Don't disturb the scallops while they are searing. Watch your heat and turn down if needed. You don't want them to burn.

    After the golden crust develops, turn scallops over and add the wine. Quickly place a lid on and turn the heat to low. Scallops will steam finish in about 1-2 minutes.

    When done, scallops will still be slightly opaque in the center. Don't worry about them being under-cooked as they cook quickly and you don't want them over-done.

    Scallops just finishing with a lid on the pan, staying hot.

    For the white wine sauce, add 2 tablespoons of unsalted butter to the pan right at then end and let it melt in. Remove the scallops to serving plates or shallow bowls, swirl the butter and wine together, and pour over the scallops.

    Serving Suggestions

    Seared scallops with white wine sauce are nice served over rice, angel hair pasta, mashed potatoes, or quinoa. I often serve them over risotto.

    Add a side green salad or green vegetable such as roast asparagus or steamed broccoli.

    Recipe FAQs

    How do I get a perfect golden sear on scallops?

    Pat the scallops completely dry before cooking. Use a hot pan with a thin layer of oil or butter. Don't move them for 1.5-2 minutes per side. Let them develop a crust before turning.

    What type of white wine should I use?

    Choose a dry white wine like Sauvignon Blanc, Pinot Grigio, or Chardonnay. Avoid sweet wines, as they can overpower the delicate scallop flavor.

    Why are my scallops rubbery?

    If your scallops are rubbery, they are over-cooked. They cook quickly! When done they will be slightly opaque in the center. Don't worry about them being under-cooked. They take just minutes to cook.

    More Easy Seafood Recipes

    Love seafood but are nervous about cooking it? Let me show you how easy and delicious it is with these recipes.

    • Close up of a platter of salmon filets with lemon and herbs on a table.
      How to Make Steamed Salmon
    • quick coconut curry shrimp
      Coconut Shrimp Curry (Quick Dinner)
    • baked lemon shrimp scampi
      Easy Baked Shrimp Scampi
    • Miso butter topped halibut on a bed of black rice in a gray bowl.
      Halibut with Miso Butter Recipe

    Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make scallops with white wine sauce, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    seared scallops | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Scallops with White Wine Sauce

    Sally Cameron
    Seared scallops are easy and versatile. Use a good non-stick pan that has a lid. For how to buy scallops or sauce ideas for serving, please read the post.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 15 minutes mins
    Total Time 20 minutes mins
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4 servings
    Calories 213 kcal

    Equipment

    • 8" - 10" Non-stick pan depending on how many you're cooking

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 ¼ - 1 ½ pounds large sea scallops 3-4 scallops per person if really big ones
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
    • 1 teaspoon olive oil or avocado oil
    • ⅓ cup white wine, light broth or water
    • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Pat scallops dry. Season top and bottom with salt, pepper, and granulated garlic. Add oil to a non-stick pan and heat over medium heat. When hot, place the scallops in a single layer in the pan. Allow scallops to cook until a golden brown crust forms, then turn carefully with tongs.
    • Pour in the wine, cover with a lid immediately and turn heat to low. Cook scallops another 1-2 minutes. Scallops will be slightly translucent in the center when done. Do not over cook them.
      Remove scallops to the plates or bowls and swirl the butter into the hot wine until melted, then pour over the scallops. Sprinkle with additional salt and pepper if desired.

    Notes

    • No wine? Use low-sodium chicken broth or water plus a squeeze of lemon juice.
    • To make dairy free, swap butter with olive oil for a lighter option or ghee for extra richness, or use a non-dairy butter.
    • Add fresh finely chopped thyme, parsley, or chives for a bright, aromatic finish.
    • For a citrus twist, add lemon zest or orange zest for a flavor contrast.
    • For a creamy white wine sauce, stir in a splash of heavy cream or crème fraîche for a richer texture.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 213kcalCarbohydrates: 7gProtein: 24gFat: 8gSaturated Fat: 4gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 63mgSodium: 925mgPotassium: 424mgFiber: 0.03gSugar: 0.2gVitamin A: 182IUCalcium: 16mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Whole Berry Cranberry Sauce

    11/18/2024 by Sally Cameron 4 Comments

    Deep red whole berry cranberry sauce in a glass bowl.

    Concerned about the sugar in traditional cranberry sauce, I created a healthier, refined-sugar-free whole berry cranberry sauce. With a fresh, tart-sweet flavor from whole cranberries and pomegranate seeds plus natural sweetness from an orange. Cranberry sauce is the perfect side for turkey, ham, or roast chicken. Time to skip the canned stuff and make your own cranberry sauce for your Thanksgiving dinner or Christmas dinner.

    A glass bowl of deep red cranberry sauce topped with orange zest garnish.

    For years I made my family traditional cranberry sauce recipe starting with a can of Ocean Spray canned cranberry sauce. When I read the label I was shocked at the amount of sugar. One 14 ounce can has 121 grams of sugar! That is equivalent to 30 little sugar cubes.

    I had to create something healthier but still delicious for Thanksgiving and Christmas for those who want to reduce sugar or eat lower carb, so here is my homemade whole berry cranberry sauce recipe.

    Why You'll Love Whole Berry Cranberry Sauce

    • Fresh fruit - Starts with fresh whole cranberries, pomegranate seeds, and a hint of orange.
    • Natural sweetening - No white sugar, high fructose corn syrup, or corn syrup.
    • Easy recipe - Make it in minutes, and make ahead.

    Love pomegranates? Here are 20 things to do with pomegranate seeds, the ruby jewels of the produce world.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Ingredients for whole berry cranberry sauce prepped in bowls ready to cook.
    • Cranberries: A bag of whole fresh cranberries (frozen works well too).
    • Pomegranate seeds: Either buy a pomegranate and seed it yourself (fresher), or buy the little containers of the seeds (faster). See my directions below for how to open a pomegranate.
    • Orange: A large fresh orange such as a navel or valencia, for both zest and juice.
    • Sweetener: I use a monk fruit/allulose blend to reduce sugar but you can use all or part granulated sugar if preferred. With monk fruit it is way less sugar than a traditional cranberry sauce recipe.
    • Spice: A little cinnamon adds nice flavor.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements.

    Whole berry cranberry salad is terrific with simple roast chicken breasts too.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • As this whole berry cranberry sauce is not overly sweet, make it sweeter if preferred.
    • Substitute orange blossom honey or maple syrup for the monk fruit if desired.
    • Use other warm spices with the cinnamon such as nutmeg, allspice, or clove.
    • Use a whole cinnamon stick instead of ground cinnamon.
    • Sweeten with honey or zero-sugar honey. 

    For that traditional cranberry sauce recipe I mentioned, try this no-cook cranberry sauce with canned cranberries.

    How to Make Whole Berry Cranberry Sauce

    A microplane zester with orange zest and a small bowl of  juice.
    Step 1: Zest the orange, then juice.
    A stainless pan with orange juice and sugar melting.
    Step 2: Add the juice and sweetener into a medium saucepan and melt, stirring until until smooth over medium low heat.
    Whole berry cranberries cooking in a stainless pan.
    Step 3: Add cranberries, bring to a boil and cover with a lid. Turn to low and cook for 5-7 minutes until thickened. Turn off heat.
    Cooked cranberry sauce with a red spatula in a stainless steel pan.
    Step 4: Add pomegranate seeds, orange zest, salt and cinnamon. Cool and serve.

    How to Peel a Pomegranate

    Here's how to peel a pomegranate for whole berry cranberry sauce. It really is easy. Arils stay fresher much longer than the packaged ones. Here's how:

    A whole bright red pomegranates with cuts sliced into the skin.
    Step 1: Score the pomegranate skin with a sharp chefs knife at the points.
    Whole red pomegranate with the top and bottom end cut off revealing the interior.
    Step 2: Slice off the top and bottom.
    A broken open pomegranate in a glass bowl of water for seeding.
    Step 3: In a bowl of cold water, break open the pomegranate into sections with your hands.
    Pomegranate seeds in a bowl of water with pieces of skin.
    Step 4: Free the seeds (arils) with your fingers.
    Pomegranate arils draining in a silver colander over a sink.
    Step 5: Drain off the water and pick out any white pith (membrane).

    Serving Suggestions and Storing

    Whole berry cranberry sauce is terrific alongside roast Thanksgiving turkey, a holiday ham, or roast chicken. Anywhere where a a sweet-tart sauce would be complimentary. It's easily made ahead to save time, and one less thing to do on Thanksgiving Day. At serving time serve chilled or at room temperature. 

    Leftover cranberry sauce keeps a week in the refrigerator in an airtight container. More uses for leftovers, make a dessert out of it served over vanilla ice cream, or use it for breakfast over oatmeal or overnight oats. 

    Bonus Recipe: Cranberry Smoothie!

    I discovered that leftover cranberry sauce makes a fantastic breakfast cranberry smoothie! That's how I just finished my leftovers. I added 2-3 tablespoons to almond milk, with protein powder, creatine and boom! A great and delicious way to start the day. And because I make the cranberry sauce with monk fruit, there's no added sugar/carbs you don't need.

    Deep red whole berry cranberry sauce in a glass bowl.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I use frozen cranberries?

    Yes, you can use frozen cranberries for whole berry cranberry sauce. Thaw them  or cook them longer. A standard 12-ounce bag is about 3 cups of cranberries.

    What can I use instead of monk fruit?

    If you are not a fan of monk fruit, substitute any mild honey or orange blossom honey, maple syrup, or a low-glycemic sweetener. Each will slightly alter the flavor so you may need to make some adjustments to meet your needs.

    Can I make cranberry orange sauce ahead of time?

    Make cranberry sauce up to a week ahead of time. The flavors actually get even better. But realize in making it that far ahead you also reduce the time it lasts as a leftover after the holiday dinner.

    How do I make the sauce thicker or thinner?

    To make cranberry sauce thicker, cook it down a little more. To make it thinner, add a little water or more orange juice until your preferred consistency is reached.

    Is homemade cranberry sauce the same as cranberry relish?

    While the terms may be used interchangeably, cranberry sauce and cranberry relish are technically different. Cranberry sauce is cooked while cranberry relish is raw, often broken down in a food processor.

    More Holiday Recipes

    Be sure to check out the Thanksgiving recipes index page or Christmas recipes page for more side dishes. If you need gluten-free or dairy-free recipes ideas for Thanksgiving, check out this Thanksgiving recipe roundup!

    • Whipped sweet potatoes ready for serving in a gray bowl.
      Simple Whipped Sweet Potatoes Recipe
    • A bowl of burnished roasted Brussels sprouts glazed with Balsamic.
      Brussels Sprouts with Balsamic Vinegar
    • A bowl of bright green beans almondine with toasted buttered almonds.
      Fresh Green Beans Almondine Recipe
    • Classic herbed bread stuffing in white casserole ready to serve.
      Gluten-Free Thanksgiving Stuffing Recipe

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make whole berry cranberry sauce recipe, please comment and let me know how you liked it. If you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating. They really help other readers and I enjoy hearing from you.

    📖 Recipe

    Deep red whole berry cranberry sauce in a glass bowl.

    Whole Berry Cranberry Sauce

    Sally Cameron
    A twist on classic Thanksgiving cranberry sauce with far less sugar and the addition of pomegranate seeds for more flavor and texture. It takes just minutes to make and can be done 2-3 days ahead of time. Like a little zip? Add ginger, to your taste. It's good too. This sauce is not overly sweet; just a little tart.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 20 minutes mins
    Total Time 25 minutes mins
    Course condiment, Side Dish
    Cuisine American
    Servings 6 servings
    Calories 53 kcal

    Equipment

    • Medium saucepan about 3 quart
    • Microplane zester
    • Citrus juicer hand press or electric

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 large orange zest and ½ cup juice
    • ¼ cup granulated monk fruit/allulose blend sugar or part sugar
    • 12 ounces fresh or frozen raw cranberries washed and picked over
    • ½ cup pomegranate seeds
    • 2 pinches ground cinnamon or others such as allspice, nutmeg, etc
    • 1 pinch sea salt

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Zest the orange, then juice. You should get about 1 ½ - 2 teaspoons of zest and ½ a cup of juice.
    • Place juice, monk fruit or sugar into a medium (3 quart) pan and melt the sugar until smooth over medium low heat, stirring. Add cranberries, bring to a boil and cover with a lid.
    • Turn to medium low and cook for 5-7 minutes. Add pomegranate seeds, orange zest, salt and cinnamon. Cool and serve.

    Notes

    Sweetening:
    If you don't like or have monk fruit, substitute with orange blossom honey or maple syrup.
    The nutritional calculation is created with the monk fruit/allulose blend. If you use all or part sugar, it will change the sugar and carb count. 
    Spices:
    For cinnamon, you can also use cinnamon sticks (2-3). Simmer with the sticks in the pan and remove them before serving. 

    Nutrition

    Calories: 53kcalCarbohydrates: 20gProtein: 1gFat: 0.3gSaturated Fat: 0.03gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.05gMonounsaturated Fat: 0.03gSodium: 8mgPotassium: 135mgFiber: 4gSugar: 7gVitamin A: 104IUVitamin C: 26mgCalcium: 22mgIron: 0.2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    How to Cook Duck Breast

    02/10/2015 by Sally Cameron

    crispy seared duck breast

    Learning how to cook duck breast is easier than you might think. This pan-seared duck breast recipe starts in a hot skillet to crisp the scored skin and render the fat, then finishes briefly in the oven for tender, juicy meat. It's a restaurant-quality dinner that feels special but is simple enough to make at home.

    Sliced seared Duck Breast on cutting board.

    Duck breast may sound fancy, but it's surprisingly easy to cook at home. The key is scoring the skin, searing it until the fat renders and the skin turns crisp and golden, then finishing the duck briefly in the oven. Unlike chicken, duck breast is best served medium-rare to medium for the most flavorful, succulent results. With just a few simple steps, you can create a dish that feels gourmet but is easy enough for a weeknight dinner.

    How to Cook Duck Breast: Recipe Snapshot

    • Simple technique - Score the skin, sear until crisp, then finish briefly in the oven.
    • Rich, mild flavor - Duck breast is savory and succulent without being gamey.
    • Restaurant-quality dinner - Perfect for date night, holidays, or a special meal at home.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    • Duck breast: Boneless duck breast, skin-on.
    • Seasoning: Sea salt, ground black pepper.

    Chef's Tip: Buying Duck Breast. White Pekin is the most common duck raised in the U.S. and my preference for this recipe because it has a mild, rich flavor. Muscovy, Moulard, and Mallard duck breasts can have a stronger, more pronounced flavor, so buy what you enjoy. Packaged duck breasts are usually small and easy to handle, with 2-4 pieces per package. For this post, I used one package, almost 1 pound total, which was just right for two servings after trimming and cooking.

    How to Cook Duck Breast

    To cook duck breast, pre-heat the oven to 425° and heat a cast iron skillet over medium-high heat until very hot. While the pan is heating, trim the duck.

    How to Trim Duck breast.

    Lay the duck breasts skin side down and trim off an excess fat that is over the edge of the flesh. When you flip the duck breasts over, they will look like the above photo, clean and neat.

    Scoring duck breast so fat renders.

    Next, using a thin, sharp knife, score the duck fat into a cross hatch pattern. Slice through the fat but not into the flesh. If your knife is sharp, let the knife do it's work. Draw the knife gently across the fat with almost no pressure. The knife will slice through the fat but not through the flesh.

    Trimming duck breasts.

    After trimming and scoring, season the fat side of the duck breast with sea salt and ground black pepper. Turn the heat down to medium and place the seasoned duck breast fat side down in the pan.

    Let the duck sear for a few minutes, until the side is dark golden brown. Watch so they do not burn. Much fat will be rendered out, turning liquid in the pan.

    Crispy Seared Duck Breast in cast iron skillet.

    Turn breasts over and place pan in the over for 2-3 minutes to finish. Remove pan from the oven, lift breasts out of the fat and onto a cutting board. Allow them to stand for a few minutes, then slice across the breast. You can save the rendered fat to cook with, just strain and refrigerate.

    Chef's tip: If you do cook with wine, you don't have to open a big bottle to make the sauce. Just buy the mini, airline-sized bottles. They are great for cooking. 

    Serving Suggestions

    Serve crispy seared duck breast alone or with a sauce of your choice. I serve it with an easy blackberry sauce made with fresh or frozen blackberries. Crush the berries and simmer with a little red wine or water and low sugar jam or honey to make a sauce and serve with the duck.

    A splash of vinegar gives it a lift, use either a good regular balsamic or a blackberry or blueberry balsamic.

    Seared duck breast is good served with a simple green vegetable like broccolini or asparagus, and some riced mashed potatoes. Add a tossed green salad for balance.

    Slicing crispy seared duck breast.

    📖 Recipe

    Seared Duck Breast|AFoodCentricLife.com

    Pan Seared Duck Breast

    Sally Cameron
    With a crispy golden skin, the mild, rich flavor of duck breast is wonderful for a special dinner or even a weeknight meal, and its so easy to make. Try it with the blackberry sauce (see post). For seasoning, I use my standard blend of sea salt, black pepper and granulated garlic, but sometimes I add Chinese Five Spice.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 15 minutes mins
    Total Time 25 minutes mins
    Course Dinner, Entree, Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4
    Calories 279 kcal

    Equipment

    • Cast iron skillet or other heavy pan

    Ingredients
      

    • 2 pounds boneless duck breast I like Pekin, ask your butcher
    • ¼ teaspoon Salt pepper and granulated garlic
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Ready the oven and pan

    • Pre-heat your oven to 425°. Place a cast iron skillet or fry pan (I use a 10″ for the two of us) on the stove and heat it until very hot but not smoking.

    Trim duck breast

    • Open the package of duck breasts and drain off any liquid. Place the breasts skin side down on a cutting board and trim of excess fat that goes beyond the edges of the meat.
      Turn the breasts over, fat side up. With a thin, sharp knife, score duck skin about every ½″ into a diamond pattern. Slice through the skin and fat, but not into the meat itself. See the photo in the post for visual help. Sprinkle with salt, pepper.

    Sear duck breasts

    • When the pan is good and hot, turn it down to medium and place the breasts fat side down. The pan should sizzle when the duck hits the surface. Then you know it is hot.
    • Allow the duck skin to get crisp and dark golden brown. Watch so that it does not burn. When the color is achieved, turn the breasts over and pop the pan into the oven for 2-3 minutes.
      Remove pan from the oven, allow duck to stand for a few minutes to reabsorb its juices, then slice across the breast. Serve alone or with your choice of sauce.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 279kcalCarbohydrates: 0.1gProtein: 45gFat: 10gSaturated Fat: 3gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 3gCholesterol: 175mgSodium: 275mgPotassium: 610mgFiber: 0.03gVitamin A: 121IUVitamin C: 14mgCalcium: 7mgIron: 10mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    One Pan Italian Chicken Thighs

    10/10/2024 by Sally Cameron 18 Comments

    A round pan of golden chicken thighs in red sauce with rosemary on the side.

    Made with budget-friendly chicken thighs and a few pantry staples, these rustic Italian chicken thighs are a hearty weeknight meal. Cooked in one pan on the stovetop, it's healthy comfort food that's easy to prepare and full of flavor. Serve over pasta, rice, or on its own with all the delicious juices and vegetables for a satisfying dinner. If you enjoy Chicken Cacciatore, you'll enjoy this recipe too.

    A white pan full of braised chicken thighs in red sauce with herbs, mushrooms, rosemary sprigs.

    This juicy Italian chicken thighs recipe will remind you of Chicken Cacciatore or Hunters Chicken (cacciatore means hunter in Italian). Chicken thighs are braised with vegetables, tomatoes, wine, and herbs. It is an easy weeknight meal, or make them ahead on the weekend and serve during the week as they re-heat well. A delicious meal with big flavors the whole family will enjoy.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • One-pot simplicity.
    • Tender chicken with rich flavors and delicious sauce.
    • Healthy comfort food.
    • Leftovers make a great lunch or freeze.

    If your family loves Italian-inspired meals, try this reader favorite, Easy Chicken Parmesan.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Ingredients for Italian chicken thighs in prep bowls on a gray counter.
    • Oil: Extra Virgin olive oil is the best, great flavor and healthy.
    • Chicken: Bone-in, skin on chicken thighs. The dark meat is moist and delicious, as the bone adds flavor and moisture. Buy them the same size if possible. Options below.
    • Artichoke hearts: Canned or jarred are fine, my non-traditional swap for bell peppers.
    • Onion: Brown, yellow, white, or sweet onions.
    • Tomatoes: Canned diced tomatoes.
    • Mushrooms: Either white mushrooms or brown mushrooms, medium size.
    • Broth: Either homemade chicken broth or low sodium store chicken broth.
    • Wine: Use a little dry red wine or dry white wine to deglaze the pan (optional)
    • Garlic: Fresh garlic cloves add the most flavor, but a tube puree works too.
    • Herbs: I use a dried Italian seasoning blend including rosemary, oregano, and thyme. Finish with a little fresh parsley if desired. A few sprigs of fresh rosemary or fresh thyme are nice added in as the chicken finishes for extra flavor and color.
    • Red pepper flakes: For zesty Italian chicken thighs that have just a little kick.
    • Parmesan cheese: As a garnish over the top at serving, optional.

    Please see recipe card for measurements, salt, and black pepper.

    For another chicken thigh recipe, try these baked teriyaki chicken thighs.

    Chef's tip: When you need a little wine to deglaze a pan, don't open a big bottle. Get the airline sized bottles at the market. They work great. I always have them in the pantry for such a purpose.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Chicken substitutions:
      • Use boneless skinless chicken thighs. Get 2 pounds for 4 people.
      • Substitute bone-in chicken breasts, cut them in half crosswise or use them whole, you'll need 4 pieces.
      • For boneless, skinless chicken breasts, get 2 pounds. You can cook them whole or cut them into large pieces.
    • Use individual Italian herbs such as dried oregano, basil, marjoram, thyme, or rosemary.
    • For all fresh herbs, use 2-3 times as much as dried herbs.
    • Add thinly sliced bell peppers (more veggies is always good), or swap them for the artichoke hearts.

    Chef's Note: What is braising? Braising is a classic, two step method of cooking. Sear or brown on one side for good color, then simmer with a liquid, covered, for flavor and tenderness until done. Braising is a terrific technique to learn, and how these Italian chicken thighs are cooked.

    How to Make Italian Chicken Thighs

    Be sure to read the recipe card for detailed directions.

    Trimming chicken thighs of extra far on a cutting board.
    Step 1: Trim excess fat, then season with salt and black pepper.
    Searing chicken thighs in a wide shallow pan, skin side down, in olive oil.
    Step 2: Add oil oil to hot pan, sear chicken skin side down until golden.
    Crispy golden chicken thighs in a white pan ready for next step.
    Step 3: When skin is golden brown, remove from pan and reserve on a baking sheet. Remove all but a tablespoon of fat.
    Adding onion, garlic, and artichoke hearts to the pan to make a sauce.
    Step 4: Add onion and saute until soft, add garlic, artichoke hearts and cook another 2-3 minutes.
    Deglazing the pan with wine and broth for a tasty sauce.
    Step 5: Add the wine and deglaze the pan, scraping up the browned bits on the bottom. Add broth.
    Adding tomatoes, mushrooms, and chicken back to the pan to finish cooking.
    Step 6: Stir in the tomatoes, mushrooms, then nestle the chicken into the pan.
    White pan with a glass lid on the stovetop cooking chicken thighs and vegetables.
    Step 7: Place a tight fitting lid on top and when bubbling, turn the heat down to low and cook (braise) for 15-18 minutes until a instant-read thermometer reads the internal temperature of 165°F in the thickest part of the largest piece. 

    To Thicken the Sauce

    The sauce is very juicy. If you want to thicken it just a bit, add 2 teaspoons of cornstarch to a tablespoon of water to a small bowl and stir until smooth. Add a little of the hot pan sauce and stir, then stir into the pan. Its easier if you remove the chicken but I did it all in the pan and it worked. Just stir through. Cook for a minute then serve.

    The Right Pan

    Choose a pan wide enough that you can get all of the chicken thighs in a single layer and deep enough that you can add the rest of the ingredients without it bubbling over. You will also need a tight fitting lid. This Le Creuset 3 ½ quart casserole with glass lid is what is in the photos and it's a great buy.

    Other options, a 3 ½ quart Le Creuset brasier or a 5 ½ quart Le Creuset Dutch oven works too, even if you need to brown the chicken thighs in batches. It's a basic kitchen workhorse. For a less pricey option, try this Lodge round casserole with lid.

    For another braised chicken dish, try these braised chicken breasts with creamy cashew gravy.

    Serving Suggestions

    Serve Italian chicken thighs over pasta noodles, zucchini noodles, or rice. Add a tossed green salad with a homemade Italian dressing to balance things out. You can also serve Italian chicken thighs alone in a shallow bowl with just the juices and veggies.

    For garnishes, a dusting of fresh grated Parmesan cheese over the top adds a salty rich flavor. Also nice is some fresh finely chopped flat leaf (Italian) parsley.

    Leftover chicken makes a nice lunch the next day. Place chicken in an airtight container and top with the extra vegetables and sauce, Chicken keeps for 3 days or freezes for longer, up to 3 months for the best flavor and texture.

    White shallow pan with browned chicken thighs and red sauce with herbs, mushrooms, and rosemary.

    More Chicken Recipes

    Chicken is such a versatile and healthy protein. Here are more chicken recipe to add to your repertoire. Your family will never get bored with the same old chicken dish.

    • A plate of crispy golden chicken parmesan with pasta sauce and cheese.
      Easy Chicken Parmesan Cutlets
    • Golden baked chicken breasts on the dinner table.
      Roast Split Chicken Breast
    • A gray platter of sals verde chicken breasts with tomatillo sauce, grated cheese and chopped cilantro.
      Easy Salsa Verde Chicken (green salsa chicken)
    • chicken curry
      Curry Chicken Thighs

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make these Italian chicken thighs, please comment and let me know how you liked it, and if you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers.

    Oroginally published 2-24-2015, totally updated 10-24.

    📖 Recipe

    A round pan of golden chicken thighs in red sauce with rosemary on the side.

    Easy Italian Chicken Thighs

    Sally Cameron
    With chicken thighs and a few pantry items you can have this satisfying dish on the table in no time.  Serve over brown rice noodles, zucchini noodles or rice. As chicken thighs vary in size, you may have to eye it at the market and choose pieces over the weight. 
    3.72 from 7 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 30 minutes mins
    Total Time 45 minutes mins
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine Italian
    Servings 4
    Calories 673 kcal

    Equipment

    • 3 ½ quart braiser or casserole pan with tight fitting lid

    Ingredients
      

    • 3 pounds bone-in, skin on chicken thighs buy similar sized pieces
    • ½ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
    • 1 tablespoon olive oil
    • 1 tablespoons olive oil
    • ½ medium onion, chopped ¾ cup
    • 6 ounces artichoke hearts canned or jar quartered, drained
    • 3 cloves garlic finely chopped
    • 2 teaspoons dried herbs Italian blend, or oregano, basil, thyme.
    • 1 pinch red pepper flakes
    • ¾ cup chicken broth low sodium
    • ½ cup red wine or white wine optional, or use more broth
    • 1 15 ounce can diced tomatoes juice and all
    • 8 ounces medium mushrooms quartered

    Optional garnishes

    • 2 teaspoons fresh chopped parsley or oregano optional
    • 2 tablespoons grated Parmesan optional, skip for dairy-free

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Trim excess fat and skin from chicken thighs. Season chicken with salt and pepper. Heat olive oil in a wide shallow pan over medium heat large enough to hold the chicken flat in a single layer over medium heat. Use a 5 ½ quart Dutch oven, 3 ½ quart brasier, or 4 quart saute pan.
      Add the chicken skin side down and cook until the skin has a golden crust, 5-7 minutes. Remove the chicken to a plate or rimmed baking pan.
    • Drain excess chicken fat but leave a tablespoon. Add onion to the pan. You should hear a light sizzle when the onion hits the surface. Cook onion until soft, about 2-3 minutes, then add the garlic and cook another 30 seconds. Turn the heat down if needed so the onion does not burn.
      Add the artichokes hearts, dried herbs, and red pepper and cook 1-2 minutes. Add the wine and broth and cook 2-3 minutes, scraping up the browned bits on the pan bottom.
    • Add the tomatoes with their juices to the pan and stir to mix them in. Nestle the chicken thighs into the vegetables and add the mushrooms. Turn the heat up until the pan is bubbling.
      Place the lid on the pan, turn heat to low and cook until the chicken reaches an internal temperature of 165°, 15-18 minutes. Sprinkle with fresh herbs and Parmesan to serve.

    Notes

    Serving suggestion
    Serve Italian chicken thighs over pasta noodles, zucchini noodles, or rice. Add a tossed green salad with a homemade Italian dressing to balance things out. You can also serve Italian chicken thighs alone in a shallow bowl with just the juices and veggies.
    To thicken the sauce
    Add 2 teaspoons of cornstarch to a tablespoon of water in a small bowl and stir until smooth. Add a little of the hot pan sauce and stir, then stir the thickening mixture back into the pan. Its easier if you remove the chicken but I've done it all in the pan and it worked. Just stir through. Cook for a minute to be sure the cornstarch is cooked, then serve.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 673kcalCarbohydrates: 10gProtein: 44gFat: 48gSaturated Fat: 12gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 238mgSodium: 546mgPotassium: 815mgFiber: 2gSugar: 3gVitamin A: 238IUVitamin C: 4mgCalcium: 74mgIron: 3mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Instant Pot Beef Stew Recipe

    03/11/2023 by Sally Cameron 15 Comments

    A hearty bowl of beef stew with carrots, tomatoes, potatoes, and herbs.

    Classic comfort food at its best, this Instant Pot beef stew is packed with rich, savory flavor. Tender chunks of beef, hearty vegetables, and fragrant herbs come together in a deeply flavorful gravy. Thanks to pressure cooking, you get all the slow-simmered taste in a fraction of the time-faster than stovetop or slow cooker methods. Enjoy it fresh or freeze for an easy, comforting meal later.

    A white bowl full of rich Instant Pot beef stew with vegetables.

    Beef stew is one of those timeless meals that never goes out of style. It's warm, hearty, and deeply satisfying-perfect for chilly nights or when you're craving something cozy. The Instant Pot makes it even better by locking in flavor while cutting down on cook time. No need to simmer for hours-just set it, let the pressure work its magic, and enjoy a rich, homemade stew in no time.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love Instant Pot Beef Stew

    What makes this Instant Pot beef stew recipe a flavor bomb? Tomatoes, tomato paste, worcestershire sauce, and optionally, Parmesan. They all add umami, that fabulous fifth taste.

    • The flavors are fantastic (so report my friends and family).
    • Homemade beef stew is a classic dish.
    • An Instant Pot or electric pressure cooker makes it faster than stove top.
    • Plenty of vegetables keep it healthy and a meal in a bowl.

    Another "umami bomb" of flavor is these steakhouse mushrooms.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Labeled ingredients for beef stew on marble counter.

    Don't let the list of ingredients deter you; it's worth the prep work.

    • Beef: Buy boneless chuck roast, not pre-cut stew meat; it's easy to find.
    • Onion: A savory flavor base for a stew, use sweet, yellow, brown, or white onions.
    • Carrots: A sweet vegetable flavor addition and must-have for soups and stews.
    • Celery: Choose a head with large ribs or use an extra smaller ribs.
    • Potatoes: Gold potatoes work best and hold together; russet potatoes fall apart.
    • Cooking fat: Use both olive oil and unsalted butter, or all olive oil.
    • Herbs: Dried herbs work great as they rehydrate in the pressure cooker, use Italian seasoning.
    • Wine: Preferably a dry red wine or white wine. I use the mini airline size for cooking.
    • Tomato paste: Adds a savory richness and "umami" flavor.
    • Paprika: Adds a mild sweetness to dishes, adds color and flavor, either regular or smoked.
    • Beef broth: Use a good beef bone broth like this one. Skip canned or boxed if possible, and if that's the only option, read labels carefully. Check the freezer section for good options.
    • Diced tomatoes: Use canned tomatoes, regular or roasted.
    • Peas: Frozen peas are easy to add, thaw first. Petite peas are more tender.
    • Worcestershire sauce: Gives the beef stew a deep, satisfying flavor.
    • Bay leaf: Either dried or fresh, adds depth of flavor.
    • Cornstarch: To make a cornstarch slurry to thicken the sauce if desired.

    Please see the recipe card for salt, black pepper, and measurements. 

    Substitutions and Variations

    • If you don't have a dried Italian blend, use a combination of dried basil, oregano, thyme, and/or rosemary.
    • Substitute broth for the wine.
    • Try a dry sherry or a splash of cognac.
    • If you want to add green beans, chop them into small pieces and add with the potatoes.

    For another hearty recipe with beef, try these slow cooker shredded beef sandwiches, with either regular or gluten-free buns.

    Chef's Tip: Shortcut the process by doing your prep work ahead. Trim and cube the meat, chop the vegetables, etc. then refrigerate until 30-45 minutes before cooking your beef stew.

    How to Make Instant Pot Beef Stew

    Why use an electric pressure cooker? Because it produces a beautiful beef stew with rich, concentrated flavors done in a fraction of the time of stovetop or slow cooker beef stew recipes. I use an Instant Pot®, but you can make pressure cooker beef stew by using another brand of electric pressure cooker.

    A boneless beef chuck roast ready for trimming.
    Step 1: Trim excess fat from the chuck roast.
    Boneless chuck roast cubed for stew.
    Step 2: Cut your meat into large chunks, about 1 ½"".
    Browning beef in an Instant Pot. with oil.
    Step 3: Brown half of the beef on the saute setting in olive in a single layer, then repeat. Do it in two batches; don't crowd the meat for best browning. Remove browned meat and juices from the pot to a bowl and set aside.
    Beef stew ingredients cooking in a pot.
    Step 4: Cook onion, celery, and garlic on the saute mode until softened, then deglaze with a half cup of red wine or broth, scraping the bottom of the pot of any browned bits with a wooden spoon.
    Adding more vegetables for the beef stew to the pot.
    Step 5: Add carrots, celery, drained tomatoes, potatoes, herbs, paprika, broth, half of the tomato paste and browned beef.
    Adding browned meat cubes to the pot for cooking stew.
    Step 6: Secure the lid on, turn the top vent to the sealing position and set to pressure cooking high for 15 minutes. When done, wait 10 minutes then quick release remaining pressure.
    Finished stew inside pressure cooker with meat, vegetables, and rich gravy.

    Step 7: Carefully unlock and open the lid and stir in the the peas, the remaining tomato paste, and the worcestershire sauce. Close the pot back up and allow the remaining heat to warm the peas through for a few minutes. If using the slurry, add with the peas.

    The Best Beef for Stew

    Boneless chuck roast makes the most tender and flavorful beef stew, and it is the most traditional cut of beef for making stew. As is, it is tough cut, but pressure cooking or long cooking make it tender. There is quite a bit of trimming to do, so buy a little larger piece than you might think and trim out extra fat and tendons. Buy about a 2 ¼ pound - 2 ⅓ pound piece.

    Don't buy pre-cut beef stew meat. It's the cheapest and toughest option with a mix of piece sizes and you don't know what you are really getting. Uneven sized pieces won't cook at the same rate and some bites could be more tough than tender. 

    A mouthwatering pot of savory stew with carrots and potatoes.

    Beef Stew Serving Suggestions

    Instant Pot beef stew is a meal in itself. Garnish with grated Parmesan cheese and a sprinkle of fresh chopped parsley. Serve with crusty bread to soak up the fantastic juices (skip for low carb).

    Beef stew keeps in the refrigerator for 3 days or freezes well for longer term in an airtight container, labeled and dated.

    Recipe FAQs

    Will pressure cooking stew meat make it tender?

    Pressure cooking does tenderize the meat, but more importantly, choose the right cut of meat for beef stew. Skip "stew meat" as the pieces are usually different sizes and a mix of cuts. Do choose a boneless chuck roast. It's comes out tender with big beef flavor for Instant Pot beef stew. When you buy a piece, get a little more than you need to allow for trimming.

    What is the beef stew setting on Instant Pot?

    The beef stew setting on an Instant Pot is a pre-set for 35 minutes at high pressure. It's the same as manually choosing the pressure cooker high setting and setting your own time. I set my own time for beef stew as I my beef stew recipe cooks for just 15 minutes at high pressure with tender and delicious results. 35 minutes is not needed with the right cut of meat (go with boneless chuck roast). You can use the setting, just set a manual timer for 15 minutes.

    Is it better to slow cook or pressure cook beef stew?

    It depends on the time you have and the method you prefer. I prefer the speed and results (tender meat and great flavor) of pressure cooking for beef stew. A slow cooker is more hands off for a longer period of time.

    More Delicious Dinner Recipes

    While beef stew is a casual dish, if you love beef try my slow roasted beef tenderloin for special occasions.

    • beef tenderloin on a plate.
      Roast Beef Tenderloin (Center-Cut Chateaubriand)
    • The deep colors of beef barley soup in a white bowl with herbs.
      Beef Barley Soup Recipe (Gluten-Free Option)
    • Close up of creamy pork chops with sauce.
      Sour Cream Pork Chops Recipe
    • Close up of savory meatballs with garlic, butter, olive oil sauce with herbs..
      Baked Turkey Meatballs

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this recipe, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers. If you had an issue with it, let me help you figure it out.

    📖 Recipe

    A hearty bowl of beef stew with carrots, tomatoes, potatoes, and herbs.

    Instant Pot Beef Stew Recipe

    Sally Cameron
    Using an Instant Pot or electric pressure cooker reduces the time to get this satisfying stew on the dinner table. Lots of vegetables and herbs provide great flavor. Leftovers keep 3-4 days or freeze well.
    5 from 3 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 32 minutes mins
    Cook Time 40 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr 12 minutes mins
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4 servings
    Calories 549 kcal

    Equipment

    • Instant Pot or electric pressure cooker

    Ingredients
      

    • 2 ¼ pounds boneless chuck roast (see notes below)
    • 1 cup chopped onion
    • 1 bunch carrots ¾ - 1 pound
    • 3 large celery ribs
    • ¾ pound gold potatoes
    • 1 tablespoon butter
    • 1 tablespoon olive oil
    • 2 large garlic cloves chopped fine
    • 1 tablespoon dried Italian herb blend oregano, basil, thyme, rosemary
    • 2 bay leaves
    • ½ cup dry red or white wine optional, sub broth
    • 3 tablespoons tomato paste divided use
    • 2 teaspoons paprika
    • ½ teaspoon sea salt
    • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
    • 2 bay leaves
    • ½ cup low sodium beef bone broth
    • 1 15-ounce can diced tomatoes drained
    • ½ cup frozen peas
    • 2 tablespoons worcestershire sauce
    • 2 teaspoons cornstarch or arrowroot starch optional to thicken gravy

    Optional Garnishes for Serving

    • 2 tablespoons fresh chopped parsley
    • ½ cup grated Parmesan cheese

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Prep Meat and Vegetables

    • Trim extra fat from the chuck roast, then cut it into 1 ½" pieces. Next, chop vegetables: peel and chop onion, peel and chop carrots into 1" pieces, chop celery into ½" pieces, peel and chop potatoes into 1" pieces.

    Start Cooking

    • Set the Instant Pot to saute function to level "more"(press the saute button 3 times) for 30 minutes (so it stays hot and doesn't turn off). When the inner pot is hot add the olive oil. Add half the beef, browning on one side, then turning to brown the other. Don't crowd the pieces for best browning.
      Remove the pieces to a bowl and repeat with the remaining beef pieces. Add them to the bowl with any juices.
    • Add butter (or more olive oil) to the pot and when hot add the onions and cook until softened, then add garlic and dried herbs and cook another 30 seconds, stirring. Add wine and cook down for a minute. Add carrots, potatoes, celery, tomatoes, paprika, salt, pepper and bay leaves, broth and the browned beef. Lock lid into place, turn vent (float valve) to closed, and set the function to pressure cooking, high pressure, for 15 minutes.

    When Timing is Complete

    • When pressure cooking is complete allow pressure to come down naturally for 10 minutes then release any additional pressure manually by turning the vent open. When all pressure is released and the gauge drops, open lid carefully and stir in tomatoes, peas, worcestershire, and the last of the tomato paste. Put lid back on and allow vegetables to heat through in the hot stew.
      Serve immediately or cool and refrigerate for enjoying later. Stew will keep in the refrigerator for 3-4 days and freezes well.

    Optional: To Thicken the Sauce

    • Mix the cornstarch with 2 teaspoons of cold water and stir smooth. Stir into the pot with the peas, lock on the lid, and allow it to heat through for a few minutes.

    Notes

    After trimming the extra fat and tendons from the chuck roast you should have about 2 pounds of meat to cube. Cut the cubes into approximately 1 ½" pieces.
    Cut the carrots into 1" pieces so they don't fall apart and disappear into the stew; same for the potatoes. Bigger chunks are better than little pieces.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 549kcalCarbohydrates: 38gProtein: 63gFat: 13gSaturated Fat: 4gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 6gCholesterol: 151mgSodium: 734mgPotassium: 2041mgFiber: 8gSugar: 11gVitamin A: 19810IUVitamin C: 37mgCalcium: 161mgIron: 7mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    How to Make Chocolate Dipped Strawberries

    02/07/2012 by Sally Cameron 9 Comments

    chocolate dipped strawberries

    A dessert that is actually good for you? That would be chocolate dipped strawberries: you can indulge and not feel guilty. Chocolate dipped strawberries are the perfect treat for Valentine's Day or any special occasion. Don't spend a fortune for fancy berries off the internet; make your own, save a bundle and have fun. The accolades are almost guaranteed.

    Chocolate dipped strawberries on a white plate with sprinkle decorations.

    Few can resist the classic flavor of chocolate dipped strawberries. They've disappeared quickly at every event I've ever catered. I once made 500 for a large event. It was so much fun! A site to behold, platter after platter of gorgeous chocolate dipped strawberries. A small plate for just you and your special date or dinner guests is just as impressive.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • Easy and fun to make.
    • Make a few or make many.
    • Healthy dessert!
    Freshly washed bright red whole strawberries on a baking sheet.

    Recipe Ingredients

    • Strawberries: only fresh strawberries will do for dipping. Frozen does not work due to too much moisture when thawed.
    • Chocolate: use dark chocolate rated 70%-85% or dark chocolate chips.
    • Decorations: colored sugar or sprinkles are optional.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Use white melted white chocolate to decorate.
    • After dipping, roll in coconut or finely chopped nuts.

    Recipe Instructions

    Buying Strawberries

    Choose organic strawberries if you can for the best flavor and reduced exposure to pesticides, and go for larger berries that have nice green leaves or stem. That stem or top becomes your handle when you dip the berries.

    Washing Strawberries

    The berries must be totally dry before dipping, because water and chocolate are enemies. If they are at all wet, the water will cause the chocolate to "seize" or become an unworkable, clumpy mess. Place the berries on a tray or plate lined with paper towels while you melt the chocolate and gather your decorations.

    Choosing Chocolate

    For health benefits, choose dark, bittersweet chocolate. Go for a 70% - 85% rating. That percentage is the amount of chocolate solids. The higher the percentage, the more bitter and the less sweet the chocolate is (and less sugar). My favorites include is Hu or Theo with other good options being Scharffen Berger, Valhrona (at Trader Joes), and Guittard.

    It you want to decorate with white chocolate, I prefer Valrhona. It has the best creamy taste in white chocolate (which isn't really chocolate). You can order these brands off the internet or buy it at many grocers (like Whole Foods), some cooking stores, and sometimes Cost Plus World Market.

    chocolate dipping strawberries

    Melting Chocolate: Get Ready To Dip

    There are two ways to melt chocolate: double boiler or microwave. I prefer the double boiler method because it's easier to control the viscosity of the chocolate. Either way, you want to melt chocolate slowly to minimize any graininess.

    To set up a double boiler, place a large (4-5 quart or liter) saucepan over medium heat with a few inches of water. Bring to a strong simmer. Place a small to medium sized stainless steel bowl on top of the pan. It should fit just inside the pan, and the bottom of the pan should not touch the water. Turn the heat down to low.

    Place chocolate in the bowl and melt slowly. Once the chocolate is almost smooth, turn off the heat and stir. It will become smooth. I find that the chocolate dips and clings the best when it is not too fluid. You will feel the right temperature.

    A single perfect chocolate dipped strawberry over a bowl of melted chocolate.

    Carefully holding the strawberry by the stem, dip the berry into the melted chocolate, rolling it around to coat evenly. Leave a little berry showing at the top. Allow excess chocolate to drip off, then turn the berry upside down for a few moments.

    Place the chocolate dipped berry on a parchment or wax paper covered flat plate, platter, or rimmed baking sheet lined with parchment.

    Decorating Your Strawberries - Optional

    If you are going to decorate the berries, allow the chocolate to set for a minute, then sprinkle with decorations. Sprinkling works better than rolling as it's easier to control the coverage. Sometimes you get too much when you roll them in the decorations. Do what works best for you.

    To decorate with white chocolate patterns, melt the white chocolate in a double boiler. When fluid, drizzle the white chocolate with a fork and drag a toothpick through the white chocolate in the opposite direction. You can also use a small piping bag to create an kind of pattern you want.

    Allow the berries to dry and set up completely. You can place them in the refrigerator for about 30 minutes. They will be the best if enjoyed the day they are made, or at the latest, the next day.

    Chocolate dipped strawberries decorated with fancy sugars on a baking tray hardening to serve.

    Recipe Tips

    • How to fix seized chocolate, and tips for working with chocolate.
    • If you can't find good chocolate locally, try Chocosphere, an internet resource that is chocolate heaven! If you order chocolate in bulk, check out their website.

    More Chocolate Recipes

    • Bark bites on a round display plate for serving.
      Chocolate Bark Recipe (bark bites)
    • Chocolate Tart With Hazelnut Crust
      Decadent Chocolate Ganache Tart
    • bittersweet chocolate pudding
      Chocolate Pots de Creme (Dairy-Free)
    • Easy chocolate mousse piped into chocolate cpus with raspberries on top.
      Easy Chocolate Mousse Recipe (without eggs)

    ⭐️Did you Make This Recipe?

    If you make this recipe, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Chocolate Dipped Strawberries|AFoodCentricLife.com

    How to Make Chocolate Dipped Strawberries

    Sally Cameron
    A dessert that is actually good for you: dark chocolate dipped strawberries. They are easy and fun to make for any special occasion treat. Choose large, organic strawberries for the best flavor and a good quality, dark or bittersweet 70% chocolate. These are best enjoyed the same day, but you can make them the night ahead and refrigerate. If you are following The Daniel Plan, skip the fancy sugars.
    5 from 2 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 20 minutes mins
    Total Time 20 minutes mins
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Servings 6 servings
    Calories 236 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • 12 large fresh strawberries preferably organic
    • 8 ounces dark bittersweet chocolate 70%-85%, chopped coarse

    Garnish Options

    • Assorted decorative sprinkles
    • 3 ounces good quality white chocolate for decorating

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Wash strawberries and allow them to dry totally and completely on a paper towel lined plate or tray. Ready another plate or tray with wax paper or parchment to hold the dipped berries.
    • Set up a double boiler. Fill a 4-5 quart saucepan with a few inches of water. Bring to a strong simmer. Place the dark chocolate in a small to medium stainless steel bowl that will fit just inside of the pan. Place bowl on top of the pan and turn heat down to low. Melt chocolate slowly, stirring occasionally until smooth. Alternatively, use the microwave at low power levels and for short amounts of time until melted.
    • Carefully holding a berry my the stem, dip and roll the berry in the melted chocolate. Allow excess to drip off, then turn the berry upside down for a few seconds to set. Place the berry on the clean lined tray. When the berry has set for a minute, sprinkle with decorative sugar if desired. To decorate with white chocolate, melt the white chocolate and use a fork to drizzle lines on the berries, then drag a toothpick across the lines to create a pattern.

    Notes

    Note - for clean white lines, allow the chocolate to set up completely, then drizzle with the white chocolate.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 2berriesCalories: 236kcalCarbohydrates: 24gProtein: 3gFat: 15gSaturated Fat: 8gCholesterol: 2mgSodium: 4mgPotassium: 297mgFiber: 4gSugar: 17gVitamin A: 19IUVitamin C: 32mgCalcium: 32mgIron: 3mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Air Fryer Red Potatoes (or oven roasted)

    03/29/2024 by Sally Cameron 11 Comments

    White bowl of golden browned air fryer red potatoes with rosemary.

    Crispy on the outside, tender on the inside, air fryer red potatoes with garlic and fresh herbs are irresistible comfort food. Make them in about 15 minutes. They are sure to become a go-to dinner side dish for weekdays and holidays. No airy fryer? No problem. I've included oven directions as well. Simple dishes are a great way to feed your family.

    A white bowl of golden, browned air fryer red potatoes with rosemary.

    I've made these crispy potatoes a hundred times if I've made them once because it's such a tasty easy recipe. While they don't take long in the oven, they are even faster in an air fryer and destined to become a regular part of your side dish recipes collection.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • Crispy air fryer potatoes are so easy!
    • Make them in about 15 minutes or a few minutes more for extra crispy.
    • Versatile side dish with roasted and grilled meats or as a breakfast side dish with eggs.

    Love potatoes? Try this buttery baby dutch yellow potatoes recipe too.

    Recipe Ingredients

    What kind of potatoes are the best potatoes for air frying? All kinds of potatoes work in this terrific little device but for this recipe I'm using red baby potatoes.

    Baby red potatoes in a glass bowls baby red potatoes, fresh rosemary, seasonings, and olive oil.
    • Red potatoes: I prefer small red skinned potatoes called baby red potatoes. They are about the size of a golfball. They're about 1 ¼ ounces each and 1 ½" in diameter. Larger red potatoes work as long as you cut them in smaller pieces. 
    • Oil: Extra virgin olive oil for it's wonderful taste and healthy profile. Avocado oil works too.
    • Herbs: Fresh rosemary is my first choice, but fresh thyme works too, and the combination is nice.
    • Seasonings: Sea salt, ground black pepper, onion powder, and granulated garlic or garlic powder. Here is one time fresh garlic is not the best choice as it tends to burn in the air fryer.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements. 

    Substitutions and Variations

    Try these ideas to change up air fryer red potatoes:

    • For more color toss with a little chopped fresh parsley before serving. 
    • Toss with finely grated parmesan cheese before serving.
    • Skip the herbs and garlic and use my Ultimate Dry Rub recipe for more of a barbecue-style or southwestern flavor.
    • No fresh herbs? Try a dried Italian seasoning blend.  

    Chef's tip for bigger flavor: Toss the hot potatoes with a teaspoon of a flavored olive oil such as rosemary, basil, or lemon olive oil. This family owned business in California produce my favorite flavored olive oils (no affiliate links, just love their oils!).

    Air Fryer Red Potato Instructions

    Start by scrubbing your potatoes clean and drying them well. Wet potatoes do not air fry well. For red potatoes there is no need to soak to reduce starch. Set up your air fryer for 400°F and timer for 12 minutes. Give the rack a quick spray of oil such as avocado oil.

    Note: Different air fryers may have slightly different timing so on your first batch, watch your potatoes and test them at the end. 

    Glass bowl with halved baby red potatoes with olive oil and herbs.
    Step 1: Cut potatoes in half, or with larger potatoes in quarters or eighths. Toss potatoes with oil, herbs, and seasonings.
    Baby red potatoes in an air fryer basket ready for cookng.
    Step 2: When air fryer is pre-heated, arrange red potatoes cut side down in the air fryer basket in a single layer, Begin air frying. At half way, shake the basket or stir potatoes quickly with a wooden spoon. 
    Crispy golden brown red potatoes in a black air fryer basket.
    Step 3: At the end of the air fry cycle, remove a potato and test. Red potatoes should be tender when pierced with a paring knife. How crisp and brown you want them is up to you. In multiple tests in my air fryer brand, 12 minutes was good timing.

    Step 4: Finish the potatoes. When the air fryer cycle is complete, potatoes are ready to serve. If you don't need them immediately, turn off the air fryer and allow them to hold warm for a few minutes. Potatoes will continue to crisp and brown a bit.

    Chef's tip for air fryers: When you have to open the air fryer to stir or turn ingredients, do it as quickly as possible as every moment the air fryer is open you're losing heat. Same for larger, standard ovens, except with ovens you have a door to close to preserve the heat and temperature.

    Roasted Red Potatoes in an Oven

    Raw red potatoes with olive oil and rosemary in oven for roasting.

    No air fryer? No problem. Make oven roasted red potatoes instead. This is how I originally made them until I got my air fryer. Follow the same directions as if prepping potatoes for the air fryer.

    Place potatoes cut side down on a rimmed baking sheet and roast at 400°F for approximately 25-30 minutes or until they are crusty, crisp and golden on the outside and tender on the inside when pierced with the tip of a paring knife.

    Crisp brown roasted red potatoes on a baking tray with bits of rosemary.

    Chef's tip on doubling the recipe for a crowd: How many red potatoes you can air fry at once depends on the size and capacity of your air fryer. My 6-quart air fryer holds 1 to 1 ½ pounds at once. The good thing is as red potatoes air fry so quickly it's easy to do multiple batches back to back in a short amount of time. Keep batches hot in a warm (200°F) oven or warming drawer.

    Serving Suggestions

    Air fryer red potatoes are a perfect side dish with roast chicken breasts, grilled lemon chicken breasts, sour cream pork chops, or roast classic roast beef tenderloin. 

    They are also terrific served for a hearty breakfast or brunch with scrambled eggs or omelets. Another nice addition is a seasonal fresh fruit salad to round out the menu. 

    Leftover air fryer red potatoes keep up to 4 days in the refrigerator in an airtight container. Be sure to label and date.

    Looking for more air fryer recipes? I'm working on a bunch of new recipes for an air fryer dedicated category so please stay tuned! Please subscribe in the box above to get them in your inbox along with a free welcome-book recipe series.

    Air Fryer Red Potato FAQs

    Are red potatoes good for you?

    Red potatoes can be part of a healthy, nutritious diet. They contain an impressive amount of vitamins and minerals with vitamin C, more potassium than a banana, and fiber when you keep the skin on. And since you eat red potatoes with the skin on, the answer is yes!

    Why should you shake the basket when air frying?

    Depending on what food you are air frying, it's a good idea to shake the basket half way through or turn (flip) the food for even roasting or air frying. It helps food brown and cook more evenly. But do so quickly as the longer you have the air fryer open, the more heat you are losing. If you lose a lot of heat, you may need to add a couple of minutes to the cooking time.

    What is the best way to cut red potatoes for air frying?

    It depends on the size of the potatoes. For baby red potatoes that are approximately the size of a golf ball, simply cutting them in half is perfect. For medium red potatoes, try quartering them. For larger red potatoes, you may need to cut them in eighths. The goal is red potato pieces that are about the same size for even air frying or roasting.

    More Potato Recipes!

    Whether red potatoes, yukon gold potatoes, russet potatoes, or sweet potatoes, there are many delicious ways of preparing them. Try this herbed potato salad with Mediterranean flavors, a summer favorite.

    • Baby dutch yellow potatoes wtih herbs and Parmesan cheese.
      Buttery Baby Dutch Yellow Potatoes
    • Parmesan potato wedges
      Crispy Baked Parmesan Potatoes (Sliced & Oven-Roasted)
    • scalloped potatoes gratin
      Cheesy Scalloped Potatoes
    • Whipped sweet potatoes ready for serving in a gray bowl.
      Simple Whipped Sweet Potatoes Recipe

    ⭐️Did You Make This?

    If you make these air fryer red potatoes, please comment and let me know. I enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers.

    This recipe was originally posted as Roasted Red Potatoes with Rosemary on 7/31/2012, now updated for the air fryer.

    📖 Recipe

    White bowl of golden browned air fryer red potatoes with rosemary.

    Air Fryer Red Potatoes

    Sally Cameron
    An easy side dish all year long, air fryer red potatoes with rosemary are easy and always satisfying. This recipe scales up and down easily, whether for two or for a crowd. Don't worry about leftovers, if there are any. They heat up nice the next day for dinner, tossed cold into salad or with eggs for breakfast.
    5 from 2 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 30 minutes mins
    Total Time 35 minutes mins
    Course Side Dish
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4 to 6 servings
    Calories 112 kcal

    Equipment

    • Air fryer

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 pounds baby red potatoes, scrubbed clean or small to medium size red potatoes
    • 1 tablespoon olive oil divided use
    • 1 tablespoon finely chopped fresh rosemary or fresh chopped thyme leaves
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon  ground black pepper
    • ¼ teaspoon granulated garlic powder
    • ¼ teaspoon onion powder

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Pre-heat the air fryer to 400°F and set to 12 minutes. Give the rack a small spray of non-stick such as avocado oil.
    • Halve the baby red potatoes. For medium red potatoes, quarter them. In a medium bowl, toss potatoes with the olive oil, herbs, salt, pepper, and garlic until well coated. Add the potatoes cut side down and air fry set. At the 6 minute mark, shake the basket well or stir potatoes with a wooden spoon. Complete the air fryer cycle.
    • At the end of the cycle, remove one potato and test. They should be lightly crisped and browned, and tender when pierced with the tip of a paring knife. if you want them crisper and more browned, add 2-3 minutes to the air fryer cycle. When done, serve hot or warm.
      For extra flavor, toss the hot potatoes in the same bowl you started with that had the oil and herbs in it, and add the extra 1 teaspoon of olive oil for more flavor. For more color, add some fresh chopped parsley. A little finely grated parmesan cheese is good too if you enjoy it.

    Notes

    Oven Roasted Red Potatoes:

    Prep potatoes the same as for the air fryer instructions. Place potatoes on a metal rimmed baking sheet cut side down and roast until the skin is crisp and golden and the inside is tender when pierced with the tip of a sharp paring knife or skewer, about 25-35 minutes. Check them towards the end. Timing will depend on your ovens and whether you use convection or the standard setting.
    When potatoes are done, you may need a metal spatula to remove them from the baking sheet to serve.

    To Make Ahead and Re-Heat

    Air fryer red potatoes can be made ahead and heated on a metal baking sheet at 350 degrees until hot, or back into the air fryer on the bake setting at 350°F until heat through. 

    Nutrition

    Calories: 112kcalCarbohydrates: 18gProtein: 2gFat: 4gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.4gMonounsaturated Fat: 3gSodium: 166mgPotassium: 522mgFiber: 2gSugar: 1gVitamin A: 24IUVitamin C: 10mgCalcium: 18mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Cheesy Polenta (With Poached Eggs)

    10/22/2014 by Sally Cameron 2 Comments

    pumpkin polenta with poached eggs

    For a hearty and comforting meal, try cheesy polenta topped with poached eggs. Rich and creamy, the polenta is finished with sweet butter and savory Parmesan cheese, while the poached eggs add a satisfying boost of protein. This dish is both nourishing and delicious-perfect for breakfast, brunch, or even dinner. Make the polenta ahead of time and reheat it for a quick, cozy, and flavorful meal anytime.

    Poached Eggs with Pumpkin Polenta in a blue bowl..

    Polenta, the Italian counterpart to Southern grits (though made from a different type of corn), is creamy and satisfying. After trips to San Francisco and Austin, and both a breakfast and lunch of polenta and grits, we were hooked on this creamy, traditional bowl of goodness. That's when I started making cheesy polenta at home. This savory porridge is a great breakfast-for-dinner option too. The variation addition of canned pumpkin is delicious!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love Cheesy Polenta

    • Easy to make comfort food.
    • Versatile: enjoy for breakfast, brunch, lunch or dinner.
    • Use different cheeses.
    • Use the pumpkin (nice in fall) or skip.
    • It's naturally gluten-free.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Polenta

    • Onion: Gives the polenta a nice savory flavor, yellow, brown, white, or sweet.
    • Garlic: For more flavor, but optional.
    • Broth: Chicken broth, vegetables broth (or water).
    • Polenta: Polenta or coarse cornmeal. I use yellow polenta. Use stone ground organic cornmeal. I generally buy this but there are other brands. Just be sure it is organic and coarse ground.
    • Cheese: Try grated parmesan cheese or cheddar cheese.
    • Butter: Unsalted butter to give it some fat, flavor, and sweetness.

    Poached Eggs

    • Eggs: Large, fresh eggs.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt, and pepper.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • For creamier polenta, use half milk and half broth.
    • Add canned pumpkin puree for flavor, nutrition, creaminess (optional).
    • Vary the cheeses trying gruyere, sharp cheddar, Monterey Jack, or Jalapeno Jack, fontina, cream cheese, smoked gouda, or goat cheese.
    • For more savory flavor, add a little dried sage or rosemary (optional).
    • To make it a little more special and increase the protein, top the polenta with ribbons of Prosciutto or ham, then add the eggs.
    • Skip the poached eggs and use links of cooked chicken sausage.
    Coarse cornmeal spilled onto a gray cutting board.

    Recipe Instructions

    Chop the onion and garlic and cook over medium low heat until soft, pour in the broth and boil, then slowly add the cornmeal whisking so it does not clump. Cook approximately 20 minutes stirring occasionally on low heat, covered. You will know when it is done when it tastes creamy with a little bite to it.

    If it gets a little dry, add hot water or more milk or broth and stir until creamy. When it's done, stir in the butter and cheese. Keep it warm while you poach the eggs(if making).

    Creamy cooked polenta in a pot.

    Ways to Poach Eggs

    I've tried 4-5 methods to poach eggs, some with more success than others. Some look pretty and some look pretty ragged with egg white threads or tendrils everywhere. Just not clean enough for me, so here is what I do.

    Standard Method

    I've tried the standard method of bring water to a simmer, add a little white vinegar, swirl the water and gently plop a cracked whole into the vortex of the water. While you can certainly do this, I usually end up with the shaggy egg whites floating everywhere.

    One improvement - I've had better results if I first crack the egg into a fine, small strainer and allow the watery white to drain off, then add the egg to the simmering water.

    I've tried the poaching bags that look like coffee filters with ok results, but not great.

    A wire basket of brown eggs.

    Poaching Pan

    The easiest way to get perfect results is using a small pan that comes with a non-stick insert. The insert has four to six little round cups plus a lid to cover the pan. This is the method I keep going back to. I've got the timing down to 3 ½-4 minutes for softly runny yolks with nicely set white and there is no mess with floating egg white tendrils. You get perfectly round poached eggs.

    Be sure to spray the non-stick insert with non-stick spray. I know that sounds redundant, but if you don't, the eggs could still stick. It's like insurance. The pan is very inexpensive and available at cooking stores and online.

    A single bowl of polenta with poached eggs on top.

    Serving and Storage

    Divide the polenta between warmed bowls and top with poached eggs or our other favorite, sliced and brown chicken sausage. Sprinkle with fresh chopped herbs and an extra sprinkle of Parmesan cheese.

    Cheesy polenta will last 3 to 5 days in the refrigerator if stored properly in an airtight container. Leftovers are good as they save you time for another quick meal.

    Freezing

    Cheesy polenta freezes well. I freeze it in portioned containers of 2 servings each for up to 3 months. Label and date. To reheat frozen polenta (for creamy polenta):

    • Thaw Overnight: Let it thaw in the fridge overnight.
    • Reheat on Stovetop: Heat gently in a pot, adding a splash of water, milk, or broth to restore the creamy consistency.
    • Stir in Butter or Cheese: Finish with extra butter or cheese for a fresh taste.

    Recipe FAQs

    What can I serve with cheesy polenta?

    Polenta is a versatile base for roasted vegetables, grilled meats, sautéed mushrooms, or poached eggs. I also like to quickly brown sliced cooked chicken sausage and pile it on the polenta.

    Can I make polenta without dairy?

    To make polenta vegan or dairy-free, make it with vegetable broth or water (broth adds more flavor), and use non-dairy butter and plant-based cheese.

    What type of cheese works best for polenta?

    A good melting cheese works perfect for polenta. Parmesan, asiago, pecorino, gruyere, goat cheese, cheddar cheese, jack cheese or even jalapeño jack for a little kick.

    More Cheesy Goodness Recipes

    What doesn't cheese make better? Try a few of these recipes with cheese to jazz up your meal time pleasure.

    • Ricotta cheese spinach filling in a bowl on the counter.
      Best Ricotta Cheese Filling Recipe
    • Spinach stuffed mushrooms on a gray serving plate with melted parmesan on top, with parsley.
      Spinach Stuffed Mushrooms With Parmesan Cheese
    • roasted broccoli
      Roasted Broccoli with Parmesan and Lemon
    • Zucchini casserole topped with browned curst of breadcrumbs and parmesan, with silver spoon.
      Zucchini Casserole with Parmesan Crust

    Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make cheesy polenta, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Cheesy Polenta with Poached Eggs

    Sally Cameron
    Creamy pumpkin parmesan polenta topped with poached eggs makes a great fall breakfast. It's good as breakfast-for-dinner too. Leftovers keep well for 3-4 days in the refrigerator and it re-heats beautifully. For options on poaching eggs, please see post. I use a poaching pan with non-stick insert.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 30 minutes mins
    Total Time 40 minutes mins
    Course Breakfast
    Cuisine American
    Servings 6
    Calories 276 kcal

    Equipment

    • A heavy pot like a Dutch oven with a lid 3 ½ quart size

    Ingredients
      

    Cheesy Polenta

    • 1 tablespoon olive oil
    • ¾ cup finely chopped onion
    • 3 cloves garlic finely chopped
    • 2 cups broth chicken or vegetable
    • 2 cups milk
    • 1 cup polenta or coarse cornmeal
    • ½ cup grated parmesan cheese see cheese options below
    • ¼ teaspoon salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper or white pepper
    • 3 tablespoons unsalted butter

    Poached Eggs

    • 6 large eggs

    Garnishes and Options

    • 1 cup canned pumpkin puree optional
    • 2 teaspoons chopped fresh parsley or chives as garnish optional
    • ½ teaspoon dried sage or rosemary mixed in with the broth
    • 4 tablespoons toasted pumpkin seeds Recipe on this site

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Make Polenta (grits)

    • Add oil to a medium pot. When oil is warm, add onion and cook until it is soft and translucent, about 3 minutes. Add garlic and cook 1 minute.
    • Add broth to pot and bring to a boil. Add cornmeal and stir well or whisk so it does not clump. Turn heat to low and cover. Cook polenta approximately 20 minutes, stirring several times so it does not stick on the bottom of the pan. If it looks or feels a little dry, add ¼ cup of water and stir until creamier.
      When polenta is near done, taste to feel the texture. It should be creamy with a little bite from the coarse-ness of the grain. Adjust with any additional milk, water, or broth. When done, stir in the butter and parmesan cheese.

    Poach eggs

    • When polenta is done, fill poaching pan half way with water and add non-stick insert. Spray egg inserts with non-stick. Place lid on pan and bring to a strong simmer.  Crack an egg into each cup. Place lid back on pan and poach eggs. Medium poached eggs with softy runny yolks will take approximately 3 ½ minutes once covered.

    Serve

    • Ladle ¾ cup of polenta into shallow bowls and top with poached eggs. Sprinkle with chopped chives or parsley if desired.

    Notes

    Cheese options
    Instead of the parmesan, use grated sharp cheddar cheese, crumbled goat cheese, jalapeno jack, asiago, pecorino, gruyere, sharp cheddar, Monterey Jack, Jalapeno Jack, fontina, cream cheese, smoked gouda. Most good melting cheeses works. 
    Pumpkin option
    If using the pumpkin option, add ½ cup of canned pumpkin at the end with the cheese and heat through. 
    Reheating cheesy polenta
    As polenta holds in the refrigerator it becomes stiff. To reheat, add to a pot and stir or whisk in milk or water until the creaminess desired is achieved. 
    Nutrition note
    The nutrition calculation does not include the eggs. Two large eggs provide 10 grams of fat and 12 grams of protein, and 187 grams of cholesterol.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 276kcalCarbohydrates: 29gProtein: 9gFat: 14gSaturated Fat: 7gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 5gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 32mgSodium: 299mgPotassium: 279mgFiber: 1gSugar: 5gVitamin A: 436IUVitamin C: 2mgCalcium: 187mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Easy Homemade Canned Cranberry Salad

    11/17/2023 by Sally Cameron 13 Comments

    Cranberry salad toped with whipped cream and orange zest.

    It wouldn't be Thanksgiving dinner without this cranberry salad. With a combination of fresh and canned fruit (or all canned), canned cranberry salad is a classic recipe for your Thanksgiving table. Serve it with a roast turkey or ham, roast chicken, or a savory pork roast. It's a taste of home for the holiday season. Whipped cream optional. It's super simple to make without jello.

    A cranberry, orange, pineapple and walnut salad in a white bowl with a silver spoon.

    Mom called it cranberry salad, Aunt Rose call it a cranberry relish, I call it cranberry sauce. Whatever you call it, it's our family traditional easy cranberry salad. It's a sweet counterpoint to the savory meats for your fabulous holiday meal. And while they topped it with whipped cream, I pass!

    Cranberry Salad Recipe Snapshot

    • Easy festive recipe, no cooking required.
    • Make it ahead for one less thing to do on the holiday.
    • Just 4 simple ingredients, whipped cream optional.
    • No cream cheese or jello powder.
    • Perfect alongside your Thanksgiving turkey or for Christmas dinner.

    For a fresh cranberry sauce recipe, try this orange cranberry relish with fresh cranberries and pomegranate seeds. It's another delicious side dish.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Ingredients for cranberry salad with pineapple and oranges.

    Canned cranberry salad

    • Canned cranberries: Use canned whole berry cranberry sauce, not the cranberry jelly.
    • Pineapple: Buy canned crushed pineapple in water or juice, not heavy syrup.
    • Oranges: Use fresh oranges or blood oranges and save the orange zest for garnish.
    • Nuts: Buy chopped walnut pieces or get them whole and chop them.

    Optional whipped cream garnish

    • Heavy cream: For a whipped cream topping to the cranberry salad buy heavy whipping cream. For me it's optional, but not for my mom!
    • Vanilla extract: Add a little good vanilla and a little sweetener to the heavy cream before whipping.

    Please see the recipe card for quantities and measurements.

    For another delicious fall salad, try this honeycrisp apple salad with my favorite apples.

    Chef's Tip: When buying canned cranberries, be sure to read the labels. Unfortunately Ocean Spray whole berry cranberries contains both high fructose corn syrup and corn syrup. Really disappointing. Look for an organic brand at the grocery store without the bad stuff, much better!

    Another fruit salad option is this colorful fresh fruit salad. Vary what you use with the season. This is great with a holiday breakfast.

    Substitutions or Variations

    • Substitute fresh pineapple for canned crushed and cut it into small pieces.
    • Use canned mandarin oranges instead of fresh oranges.
    • Swap the walnuts for pecans or eliminate them for nut allergies.
    • Add a little bit of ground cinnamon or ginger for a nice twist.

    If you like nuts, try these maple glazed pecans, and for a cocktail nibble, make a batch of these spicy roasted cashews.

    Recipe Instructions

    The best part about this whole cranberry sauce is that there is no cooking involved.

    Cutting orange segments from oranges with a paring knife.
    Step 1: With a paring knife, cut individual segments from oranges.
    Fruit for a cranberry salad draining in a colander.
    Step 2: Add all of the fruit to a sieve or colander over a large bowl and briefly drain excess juices.
    Fruit for a cranberry salad combined with chopped walnuts in a glass bowl.
    Step 3: After draining, add everything to a bowl with chopped nuts and mix gently.
    Cranberry salad toped with whipped cream and orange zest.
    Step 4: At serving, top with lightly sweetened whipped cream with a little vanilla extract (optional).

    Chefs Tool Tips: For straining and draining needs, a tool called a drum sieve is really handy. They come in nesting sets and have no handles so they take up little storage room and fit inside or over bowls. For easy sectioning of fruits such as oranges and grapefruit, get an inexpensive grapefruit knife.

    Serving Suggestions

    Serve canned cranberry salad chilled or closer to room temperature. The jewel-like colors are beautiful on the table. Got Thanksgiving leftovers? I hope so! There are lots of ways to enjoy leftover cranberry salad:

    • Serve it alongside a leftover turkey sandwich or a ham sandwich.
    • it's good alongside egg dishes.
    • Top plain Greek yogurt for special breakfast.
    • Put a little on overnight chia oats or warm oatmeal.
    • Serve it with breakfast with these golden crispy light gluten-free waffles, pancakes, or these easy, festive gluten-free dutch baby pancakes.

    Leftover cranberry sauce holds 3-4 days in the refrigerator in an airtight container.

    Save the Juices

    Save the juice that drains from the fruit. It tastes wonderful mixed with a little ginger ale, sparkling mineral water, or club soda for the kids. Try it mixed with Champagne or sparkling white wine for a sort of Thanksgiving Kir Royale.

    Recipe FAQs

    How do I prevent cranberry salad from becoming too watery?

    The key to a non-watery cranberry salad is to drain it in a colander or fine strainer over a bowl. Save the juices if desired.

    Can I use fresh cranberries instead of canned for the salad?

    The way to use fresh cranberries for the salad instead of canned cranberries is to slowly cook fresh cranberries in a pan on the stovetop over medium heat with a little water or orange juice and a little sugar or monk fruit blend (for low to no sugar) until they are saucy and thick. Cool fresh cooked cranberries, then continue with the cranberry salad by adding the fresh orange segments, pineapple, and chopped nuts.

    Can I add other fresh fruits to canned cranberry salad?

    If you want to add other fruits to a canned cranberry salad, try adding pomegranate seeds or raspberries. Both are a delicious addition.

    How do you make canned cranberry salad?

    Making canned cranberry salad is so easy! Use canned whole berry cranberry sauce, oranges (fresh or canned mandarins), crushed canned crushed pineapple, and chopped walnuts or pecans. Add the fruit to a strainer over a bowl to catch the juices and drain for a few minutes. Place in a bowl, add nuts and mix gently. So simple. See my recipe for quantities and directions.

    More Terrific Fall Recipes

    While we're getting ready for Thanksgiving, we still need to eat! Here are some easy recipes to have in your arsenal as we lead up to the big feast. If you need gluten-free or dairy-free recipes ideas for Thanksgiving, check out this Thanksgiving recipe roundup!

    • Boursin mashed potatoes with melted butter in a white bowl with gold spoon.
      Boursin Whipped Potatoes
    • A plate of 3 gluten-free soft chocolate chip cookies and a cup of espresso.
      Gluten-Free Soft Chocolate Chip Cookies
    • A pan of mediterranean chicken thighs in golden broth with veggies and herbs.
      Mediterranean Chicken Thighs
    • A jar or homemade applesauce with apples on the side, and cinnamon sticks.
      Homemade Applesauce

    ⭐️Did you Make This?

    If you make this recipe, please comment and let me know, and if you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Cranberry salad toped with whipped cream and orange zest.

    Easy Canned Cranberry Salad

    Sally Cameron
    No cooking makes this simple enough for anyone to make. Just drain, mix and embellish if you desire. This old classic recipe never fails to delight.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    draining time 15 minutes mins
    Total Time 25 minutes mins
    Course Salad
    Cuisine American
    Servings 10
    Calories 183 kcal

    Equipment

    • Large bowl
    • Sieve or fine strainer
    • Grapefruit knife optional

    Ingredients
      

    • 2 14 ounce canned whole berry cranberry sauce
    • 1 20 ounce canned pineapple chunks in water for fresh see below
    • 2 oranges for mandarin oranges see below
    • ½ cup chopped walnuts toast them if you'd like for more flavor

    Optional Garnish

    • ¾ cup heavy cream optional
    • 1-2 teaspoons vanilla extract optional

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Set a large strainer or colander into a deep bowl. Pour cranberries, pineapple and mandarin oranges (if using canned) into the strainer and drain for three to four hours, covered with plastic wrap and refrigerated.
    • Add chopped walnuts and orange segments (if using fresh), and gently mix to combine. Transfer to a glass or crystal bowl to show off the pretty color of the salad. Spoon or pipe whipped cream on top of the salad around the edges (if using)

    Notes

    The salad will hold in the refrigerator, covered, for 2 days so you can make it ahead. Don't do the whipped cream garnish until serving time (if using). Serve chilled or more towards room temperature if you prefer.
    To whip the cream - Using a hand mixer or an immersion blender with whisk attachment, beat cold heavy cream with a 1 teaspoon pure vanilla extract and 1-2 teaspoons sugar, honey, or powdered monk, until soft peaks form. Dollop mounds of the whipped cream around the edge of the cranberry salad.
    Fresh fruit swaps:
    Instead of fresh oranges, use a small can of mandarin oranges in water, drained.
    For fresh pineapple, get a container of fresh pineapple chunks in the refrigerated produce section and cut into small pieces. 

    Nutrition

    Calories: 183kcalCarbohydrates: 34gProtein: 1gFat: 4gSaturated Fat: 0.4gPolyunsaturated Fat: 3gMonounsaturated Fat: 1gSodium: 12mgPotassium: 97mgFiber: 2gSugar: 26gVitamin A: 60IUVitamin C: 14mgCalcium: 16mgIron: 0.2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Lemon Ricotta Pancakes

    03/06/2011 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

    Ricotta pancakes

    These lemon ricotta pancakes are a fresh take on a brunch favorite-light, lemony, and tender from the creamy ricotta. The recipe comes from the Mauna Lani Bay Hotel on the Big Island of Hawaii, where they were served with warm ginger syrup and became one of their most requested dishes. After enjoying them myself, I asked for the recipe so you could enjoy it too. With that kind of reputation, it's no wonder these are considered some of the best lemon ricotta pancakes around.

    big island pancakes | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Pancakes may be standard breakfast fare, but made with ricotta cheese and a generous dose of lemon zest, these are anything but ordinary. The original recipe was made with wheat flour, but pancakes are easy to adapt to gluten-free. The ricotta keeps them tender and moist. For gluten-free lemon ricotta pancakes, use a gluten-free 1:1 baking blend. They turn out light and fluffy every time.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love Lemon Ricotta Pancakes

    You might also know these as lemon ricotta hotcakes. Whatever you call them, they're a treat!

    • Light and fluffy - Ricotta keeps them moist and tender, never dry or heavy.
    • Bright citrus flavor - A generous dose of lemon zest adds fresh, vibrant lift.
    • Make them gluten-free - Use a quality 1:1 GF flour blend.
    • Perfect for brunch - A treat for guests or a cozy weekend breakfast.
    • Syrup options - See the section below for options.

    What You'll Need

    • Eggs - Both yolks and whites, separated.
    • Ricotta - Whole milk ricotta cheese for best flavor and texture.
    • Butter - Unsalted butter, not salted.
    • Vanilla - A good quality vanilla extract.
    • Flour - All-purpose flour or a 1:1 gluten-free flour blend (I use King Arthur).
    • Sugar - Natural sugar, or use a monk fruit blend for sugar-free.
    • Lemons - All you need is the zest.
    • Toppings - Syrup or powder sugar or powdered monk fruit-allulose. Berries are another topping option.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt, and the ginger syrup recipe.

    Chef's tip: For fine lemon zest, use a microplane zester. It's an inexpensive tool that I could not live without. It works great for fine garlic, chocolate, nuts, and many ingredients that you want a fine version of.

    Substitutions and Variations

    There are no substitutions for the pancake batter itself (unless you skip the lemon and make simple ricotta pancakes), but you have a few great syrup options:

    • For a shortcut, try a flavored monk fruit syrup from Wholesome Yum (my go-to). While they don't offer ginger, the vanilla, maple, or hazelnut versions pair beautifully with lemon ricotta pancakes. They also make a sugar-free honey we love.
    • Make the ginger syrup (classic version with sugar) up to two weeks in advance. Cover and refrigerate until needed. It's fantastic over waffles, crepes, ice cream, fresh fruit-anything that needs flavor and a little sweetness.
    • For a sugar-free ginger syrup, infuse monk fruit simple syrup with fresh peeled and sliced ginger. Simmer gently for 10-15 minutes, then strain.

    Chef's tip: For light fluffy pancakes, whip the egg whites before folding them gently into the batter. It adds lift and an airy texture without making the pancakes dense. Try this trick with any pancake recipe for extra fluffiness.

    How to Make Lemon Ricotta Pancakes

    While you're making the pancake batter, heat a flat griddle or large non-stick saute pan.

    1. Separate eggs, and whip whites until firm with glossy peaks.
    2. Beat ricotta, butter, egg yolks and vanilla together.
    3. Whisk together flour, sugar, salt and lemon zest. With a flexible spatula, fold dry ingredients gently into the ricotta mixture. Stir a spoonful of the whipped eggs whites into the batter; then gently fold in the remainder of the whites.
    4. Grease the pan with butter or non-stick spray. Drop a scant ¼ cup of batter for each pancake on the griddle. Cook until golden on the underside and the top shows small bubbles. Gently flip pancakes and cook until other side is golden. Keep warm until all pancakes are made, or serve as you go

    Serving Suggestions

    These fluffy lemon ricotta pancakes are delicious on their own with syrup, but even better with a few simple sides:

    • Fresh berries - As served in the original hotel version.
    • Fruit - A light, refreshing pairing, here's my fruit salad recipe.
    • Crisp bacon - For a salty-sweet contrast, if you enjoy bacon.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I freeze leftover pancakes?

    Yes. Let pancakes cool completely, then freeze in a single layer or stack with parchment between. Reheat gently in a toaster or warm skillet.

    Can I make lemon ricotta pancakes gluten-free?

    Yes! Use a 1:1 gluten-free flour blend in place of all-purpose flour. The ricotta helps keep the pancakes tender and moist, even without wheat flour.

    Why do I need to whip the egg whites?

    Whipped egg whites make the pancakes lighter and fluffier. It's an easy step that gives these pancakes their signature fluffy texture.

    More Breakfast Recipes

    For more breakfast and brunch ideas, be sure to check out the breakfast recipe indexLemon for plenty of inspiration.

    • Dutch baby oven pancakes
      Gluten-Free Dutch Baby (German Pancakes)
    • A piece of golden baked breakfast casserole with eggs on a plate with a fork and dollop of sour cream on top.
      Cottage Cheese and Egg Bake
    • Close up of crispy golden waffles with blueberries, raspberries, strawberries.
      Gluten Free Waffles (Crisp & Golden)
    • A single bowl of healthy overnight oats with blueberries and pomegranates seeds.
      High Protein Overnight Oats (with Chia Seeds)

    📖 Recipe

    big island pancakes | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Lemon Ricotta Pancakes

    Sally Cameron
    Thanks to the Mauna Lani Bay Hotel on the big island of Hawaii for sharing this recipe.  I've added a few notes for ease of preparation at home. The ginger syrup is great but there are options, including sugar-free. Add fresh berries, and you have a fabulous breakfast treat.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 20 minutes mins
    Cook Time 20 minutes mins
    Total Time 40 minutes mins
    Course Breakfast
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4 Yield 18-20 small pancakes
    Calories 856 kcal

    Equipment

    • Large non-stick pan or griddle

    Ingredients
      

    Ricotta Pancakes

    • 6 large eggs separated
    • 1 ½ cups whole milk ricotta cheese
    • 4 ounces unsalted butter melted and cooled
    • 2 tablespoons fresh, finely grated lemon zest
    • ½ teaspoon pure vanilla extract
    • ½ cup all purpose flour or GF flour
    • ¼ cup natural sugar or monk fruit blend
    • ½ teaspoon salt

    Optional ginger Syrup (makes ¾ cup)

    • 1 ½ cups sugar
    • 1 ½ cups water
    • 5 tablespoons small chopped pieces of peeled, fresh ginger root
    • 2 teaspoons finely grated fresh lemon zest

    Toppings

    • Powdered sugar for dusting optional
    • Assorted strawberries raspberries, blackberries and blueberries for garnish

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Making the Pancake Batter

    • Heat a flat griddle, large sauté or fry pan over medium heat. Using an immersion blender fitted with a whisk attachment or with an electric hand mixer, whip egg whites until they hold firm, glossy peaks. Set aside.
    • Beat Ricotta, butter, egg yolks and vanilla together. Set aside. Whisk together flour, sugar, salt and zest. With a flexible rubber spatula, stir dry ingredients gently into the Ricotta mixture. Stir a spoonful of the whipped eggs whites into the batter; then gently fold in the remainder of the whites.

    Cooking the Pancakes

    • Grease the heated griddle or pan with butter or non-stick spray. Drop a scant ¼ cup of batter for each pancake on the griddle. Cook until golden on the underside and the top shows small bubbles. Gently flip pancakes and cook until other side is golden. Set aside on a plate and keep warm until all pancakes are made, or serve as you go.
    • To serve, dust the pancakes with powdered sugar and pour warmed ginger syrup. Serve with fresh berries if desired.

    Optional ginger syrup

    • Combine all ingredients in a small saucepan; stir over medium heat until sugar dissolves. Turn up the heat and boil until reduced to ¾ of a cup, about 5 minutes.  Cool, then refrigerate until serving.

    Notes

    Syrup options
    • Try a flavored monk fruit syrup from Wholesome Yum (my go-to). While they don't offer ginger, the vanilla, maple, or hazelnut versions pair beautifully with lemon ricotta pancakes. They also make a sugar-free honey we love.
    • Make the ginger syrup (classic version with sugar) up to two weeks in advance. Cover and refrigerate until needed. 
    • For a sugar-free ginger syrup, infuse monk fruit simple syrup with fresh peeled and sliced ginger. Simmer gently for 10-15 minutes, then strain.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 856kcalCarbohydrates: 105gProtein: 21gFat: 42gSaturated Fat: 24gPolyunsaturated Fat: 3gMonounsaturated Fat: 12gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 354mgSodium: 472mgPotassium: 261mgFiber: 1gSugar: 88gVitamin A: 1477IUVitamin C: 6mgCalcium: 247mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Oven RoastedAsparagus

    03/20/2011 by Sally Cameron 10 Comments

    roast asparagus

    Oven roasted asparagus is the perfect springtime side dish and it could't be any easier! My go-to method for cooking asparagus is roasting in a hot oven for just a few minutes until it's still crisp-tender. Enjoy roast asparagus simply, or use a garnish or easy vinaigrette to keep things tasty and interesting.

    Asparagus on a roasting pan.

    I love asparagus and could eat it every day. Good thing it's also a versatile vegetable. Roast asparagus, steam asparagus, add it to a stir fry, or puree it into a beautiful creamy asparagus soup. You'll love all of these preparation ways.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Oven Roasted Asparagus Recipe Highlights

    • Oven roasted asparagus is simple.
    • Serve it plain with olive oil or use a little garnish for more flavor and color.
    • Goes with many main dishes.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    • Asparagus: Choose bright green spears with tightly closed tip. Hopefully the store has the asparagus standing in a little cold water to keep it fresh and from drying out. Skip any yellowed spears or frazzled looking tips. I prefer the medium size asparagus spears as they are meaty but not tough or woody. Super thin spears roast faster, fatter spears take a little longer.
    • Oil: Extra virgin olive oil lends lovely flavor.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt and pepper.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • For Asian flavor, swap the olive oil with toasted sesame oil an a sprinkle of sesame seeds.
    • Instead of salt and pepper, use a spice blend such as Everything But The Bagel (I love Traders Joe's).
    • Create variations using a sprinkle of fresh herbs, chopped crisp bacon, chopped hardboiled egg, grated parmesan, or fresh zested lemon peel.
    • Another option is to drizzle with a light vinaigrette while it's hot, like this easy homemade Italian dressing or a creamy ginger vinaigrette.

    How to Roast Asparagus in the Oven

    Step 1 - Prep asparagus - hold the bottom of the stalk and bend it near the end. It should snap off where the tender part meets the tough part. It takes just a minute to snap the ends off a bunch. If you have a large quantity, snap the ends off a few spears to get an idea of where they are breaking, then line them up and cut them off with a sharp knife.

    Get Ready to Roast

    Pre-heat the oven to 425°F for regular oven mode or 400°F for convection mode. Lined a rimmed baking sheet with foil or parchment. Place asparagus on a foil covered rimmed baking sheet.

    Drizzle asparagus with oil and sprinkle with salt and pepper. That's it. sometimes I add granulated garlic powder.

    Roasting Asparagus

    Roast asparagus for about 8-10 minutes until crisp-tender when pierced with the tip of a paring knife. Timing will depend on your ovens, how tender you like your asparagus, and how thick the spears.

    Fresh Asparagus | AFoodCentricLife.com

    How to Store Asparagus

    There are two main ways to store asparagus. Standing and flat.

    To store asparagus standing, trim a small amount off the bottom ends when you get home from the grocery store. Stand asparagus spears in a glass jar with an inch of water in the bottom covering the trimmed ends. Refrigerate and use with in a few days. Cover the tips loosely with a plastic bag.

    To store asparagus flat, trim them bottom ends, wrap the ends in damp paper towels, then into a plastic zip bag.

    Roast Asparagus | AFoodCentricLife.com
    Roast asparagus with prosciutto, lemon zest, Parmesan.

    Serving Suggestions

    Here's way to dress up roast asparagus:

    • Sprinkle with grated parmesan cheese
    • Scatter toasted breadcrumbs (regular or gluten-free) over the top for a little crunchy texture.
    • Add chopped crisp bacon or prosciutto.
    • Use your favorite chopped nuts like walnuts, pine nuts, pecans, macadamia nuts, or toasted pumpkin seeds (pepitas).
    • Drizzle with hollandaise, a classic combination, served either warm or chilled.
    • Try this homemade herbed mayonnaise.

    📖 Recipe

    Roast Asparagus | AFoodCentricLife.com

    How to Roast Asparagus

    Sally Cameron
    Simple, fast, and healthy, asparagus roasts in just minutes. Choose fresh, bright green slender spears with tight tips. Plan for 5 spears per person. Delicious garnishes are optional and dress the dish up for a special dinner.
    4.50 from 2 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 5 minutes mins
    Total Time 15 minutes mins
    Course Side Dish
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4 servings
    Calories 53 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 bundle asparagus trimmed
    • 1 tablespoon olive oil
    • Salt and pepper to taste

    Optional Garnishes

    • 6 slices Prosciutto sliced thin crosswise and crisped in a non-stick fry pan
    • 3-4 tablespoons grated Parmesan cheese
    • 2 tablespoons toasted breadcrumbs
    • 2-3 tablespoons toasted chopped pecans or hazelnuts
    • 1 tablespoon finely chopped fresh chives or parsley
    • 1 tablespoon fresh lemon zest

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Pre-heat oven to 425 degrees. Cover a rimmed baking sheet with foil.  
    • Place trimmed spears in a single layer in the baking sheet and drizzle with oil, salt and pepper. Roast for approximately 3-4 minutes until just pierced with the sharp tip of a knife.
    • Roast to your own preference and tenderness.Garnish with optional toppings as preferred.

    Notes

    Nutrition facts are for asparagus and oil only.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 53kcalCarbohydrates: 4gProtein: 2gFat: 4gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.4gMonounsaturated Fat: 3gSodium: 2mgPotassium: 227mgFiber: 2gSugar: 2gVitamin A: 851IUVitamin C: 6mgCalcium: 27mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Steamed Artichokes with Lemon-Garlic Aioli

    05/12/2011 by Sally Cameron 8 Comments

    steamed artichokes

    Steamed artichokes are one of my favorite seasonal appetizers: simple, special, and always a crowd-pleaser. If you've ever wondered how to steam artichokes, this easy method walks you through it. Serve them warm, at room temperature, or chilled with a creamy lemon-garlic dipping sauce, or try one of the other dipping sauce options below.

    steamed artichokes

    With their earthy, nutty flavor, I've loved artichokes since I was a kid. While spring is their peak season, it's the perfect time to make steamed artichokes at home. Serve them with a quick mayonnaise-based lemon-garlic dipping sauce (or melted butter) and plenty of napkins. And don't miss the best part-once you scoop out the fuzzy choke, the tender artichoke heart is the final reward.

    Steamed Artichokes Recipe Snapshot

    • Simple and seasonal - An easy appetizer you can serve warm, room temperature, or chilled.
    • Easy method - Clear prep, steaming tips, and doneness cues so anyone can make them confidently.
    • Dipping sauce ideas included - Make the lemon-garlic aioli (in the recipe card) or try other sauce options for variety.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    store display of beautiful artichokes

    Steamed artichokes

    • Artichokes - Look for artichokes that feel heavy for their size with tight, green leaves.
    • Lemon - Add to the steaming water for brightness and a clean, fresh flavor.
    • Oil - Use olive oil for classic flavor or avocado oil for a more neutral option.
    • Bay leaf - Gently perfumes the steaming water; dried or fresh works.
    • Black peppercorns - Adds subtle background flavor to the steam.
    • Herbs - Fresh thyme sprigs add a light, aromatic note.
    • Garlic - Crushed whole cloves lightly flavor the steaming water.

    Lemon-garlic dipping sauce

    • Mayonnaise - Use your favorite mayo for a creamy base.
    • Lemon - Fresh juice (and a little zest if you like) for bright, tangy flavor.
    • Garlic - Fresh garlic adds that signature punch; microplane it for the smoothest sauce.
    • Mustard - Dijon adds tang and depth and helps the sauce taste "finished."
    • Herbs (optional) - Stir in chopped parsley, chives, dill, cilantro, or chervil for a fresh, herby finish.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt and pepper.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Lime instead of lemon - Make a lime dipping sauce by swapping the lemon juice and zest for fresh lime.
    • Change the herbs - Vary the fresh herbs in the dipping sauce with parsley, chives, dill, or a mix.
    • Add a little heat - Stir in a touch of prepared horseradish for a gentle kick.
    • Use two kinds of Dijon - Combine creamy and whole-grain Dijon for extra texture and deeper flavor.

    Chef's Tip: How to buy artichokes
    Choose artichokes that are compact and plump, with tight green leaves, and that feel heavy for their size. Give one a gentle squeeze-if it squeaks, it's fresh. Avoid artichokes with leaves that are brown, dry, splitting, or flaring open (those are usually past their prime). One exception: winter-harvest artichokes may have light brown "scaling" from frost. They're not as pretty, but they still taste great.

    How to Steam Artichokes

    To prepare artichokes for steaming:

    1. Trim the top - Cut off the top third of each artichoke (a serrated knife works best).
    2. Trim the stem - Cut the stem flush with the base (or leave a short stem if you prefer).
    3. Snip the tips - Use kitchen scissors to snip off the sharp points from the leaves.
    4. Prevent browning - Rub the cut surfaces all over with a lemon half.

    Chef's note: If you're prepping ahead, keep trimmed artichokes in a bowl of cold water with lemon until ready to steam.

    Bright green raw artichokes in pan showing the fuzzy centers.

    Steam Artichokes

    You can steam artichokes two ways: directly in a pot with a few inches of water, or on a steamer rack.

    1. Set up the pot - Choose a pot wide enough to hold the artichokes in a single layer. Place the artichokes stem-side up.
    2. Add water + aromatics - Add a few inches of water (or, if using a steamer rack, add water just up to the bottom of the rack). Add lemon, herbs, and a drizzle of oil to lightly flavor the steam.
    3. Cover and steam - Bring to a simmer, cover, and steam until tender. Check occasionally and add more water if needed so the pot doesn't run dry.

    How long to steam artichokes: Steaming time depends on size. Small artichokes take about 20-25 minutes, medium 30-35 minutes, and large ones 40-45 minutes.

    How to know artichokes are done: Pull on one of the outer leaves. If it releases easily, the artichoke is ready. You can also insert a knife into the base-it should slide in without resistance.

    Bright green artichokes in a pan

    How to Serve Steamed Artichokes

    After steaming, use tongs to lift the artichokes from the pot and let them drain (top-side down) for a minute or two. Transfer to a platter and serve with the dipping sauce. Set out a small bowl for discarded leaves. Once the leaves are eaten, scoop out the fuzzy choke to reveal the tender heart underneath.

    If you want to serve them split versus whole, split the artichokes in half and remove the choke after cooking.

    Best ways to serve artichokes:

    • As a simple appetizer - Serve warm or room temperature with lemon-garlic dip, melted butter, or olive oil and a squeeze of lemon and crunchy salt.
    • As a first course - Pair with a crisp green salad (peppery arugula is perfect).
    • As a side dish - Great with roasted salmon, grilled chicken, or steak.
    • Use the hearts - Chop leftover hearts into salads, grain bowls, pasta, or fold into an omelet or frittata.

    Grilled Artichokes Option

    Steam artichokes first, then halve, remove the choke, brush lightly with olive oil, and grill cut-side down for a few minutes for smoky, crisp edges.

    Grilled artichokes on a platter with grilled lemons on teh side.

    More Appetizer Recipes

    Need a few more crowd-pleasers? These appetizer recipes are perfect for grazing, entertaining, or an easy pre-dinner nibble.

    • platter of oven baked chicken wings piled high with a buffalo ranch dressing in a small bowl.
      Oven Baked Chicken Wings
    • A platter of antipasto skewers with olives, cheese, salami, and artichoke heart for appetizers.
      Antipasto Skewers (Easy Italian Appetizer)
    • A bowl of whipped ricotta cheese dip with endive leaf in for scooping.
      Whipped Ricotta Cheese (Dip or Spread)
    • Spinach stuffed mushrooms on a gray serving plate with melted parmesan on top, with parsley.
      Spinach Stuffed Mushrooms With Parmesan Cheese

    If You Make Steamed Artichokes

    Please leave and comment and let me know! I love hearing from you and your comments help other readers too. Thanks for supporting my site, and please leave a ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐.

    📖 Recipe

    Steamed Artichokes with Dipping Sauce | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Steamed Artichokes

    Sally Cameron
    Whether boiled, steamed, or grilled, these green globes are very versatile as a snack, appetizer, stuffed, or in a main course. Share one or enjoy a whole one yourself.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 40 minutes mins
    Total Time 50 minutes mins
    Course Appetizer
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4 servings
    Calories 259 kcal

    Equipment

    • Large pot

    Ingredients
      

    Lemon Garlic Dipping Sauce

    • ½ cup your favorite mayonnaise Vegenaise
    • 1 large garlic clove finely chopped
    • 1 lemon zested and juiced
    • 1 tablespoon Dijon mustard
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
    • 2 teaspoons fresh chopped parsley or chives optional

    Artichokes

    • 2 large raw artichokes
    • 1 large lemon cut in quarters
    • 2 teaspoons olive oil
    • 1 dried bay leaf
    • 6 black peppercorns
    • 1 Sprinkle of kosher salt
    • 4 fresh thyme sprigs
    • 2-3 fresh whole garlic cloves peeled and smashed

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Make the Dipping Sauce

    • Start by making the sauce. Combine all ingredients and stir until smooth. Can be made ahead of time, covered and refrigerated until serving time.

    Prep artichokes

    • Cut the top one third off with a serrated knife. The teeth of a serrated knife make it easier to cut through the tough exterior. Discard the trimmings. Trim the bottom stem flush with the base. Next, trim off the prickly point of each leaf with a pair of kitchen scissors. Rub a cut lemon over the artichoke to prevent it from browning. 

    Cook Artichokes

    • Cook the artichokes. In a deep pan wide enough to hold artichokes, place trimmed artichokes stem side up in the bottom of the pan (or place on a steamer rack). Fill pan with a few inches of cold water. Squeeze lemon juice over the artichokes and put rinds in the pan. Drizzle in olive oil, sprinkle with kosher salt, add bay leaf, black peppercorns, thyme sprigs and garlic.
    • Cover the pot with a tight fitting lid and bring to a boil. When steam starts coming out of the pan, turn the heat down to low and cook artichokes until you can pierce the center of the stem with a paring knife. The timing will depend on the size of the artichokes. For big ones test at 20-25 minutes and continue if needed for a few minutes. Another way to tell when an artichoke is ready is to pull off and outer leaf. It should come off easily. Doing both tests is a good idea. 

    Serve Artichokes

    • Remove the artichokes from the pan and drain on a towel. At this point, you can arrange the artichokes on a platter and serve them hot, at room temperature or chilled with the sauce. Be sure to put an empty bowl out for the eaten leaves.

    Optional Grill Finish

    • To finish by grilling, split the artichokes in half from top to bottom, remove the fuzzy choke, brush with a little olive oil and place on the grill for a few minutes until a little charred. This enhances the earthy, nutty flavor and makes for a great presentation. Serve with lemon garlic dipping sauce.

    Notes

    Buying artichokes:
    Fresh artichokes should be compact, plump ,and feel heavy for their size, and they should squeak when squeezed. The leaves should be green and tightly closed.
    More dipping sauce options:
    Green Goddess – Herb-forward and classic with artichokes.
    Chimichurri – Bright and garlicky, especially good if you’re serving artichokes with grilled meats.
    Creamy Paprika Sauce – Smooth, creamy, and full of warm Hungarian-style paprika flavor. (If you want a smoky twist, use smoked paprika instead.)

    Nutrition

    Calories: 259kcalCarbohydrates: 17gProtein: 4gFat: 20gSaturated Fat: 2gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.4gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gSodium: 424mgPotassium: 399mgFiber: 6gSugar: 2gVitamin A: 80IUVitamin C: 40mgCalcium: 62mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Simple Whipped Sweet Potatoes Recipe

    10/29/2024 by Sally Cameron 17 Comments

    Whipped sweet potatoes ready for serving in a gray bowl.

    These simple whipped sweet potatoes are an easy, welcome side dish for the holidays or any day. With their natural sweetness, there's no need for marshmallows, brown sugar, or maple syrup. Their creamy texture makes them a nutrient-rich comfort food classic. Just steam the sweet potatoes until tender, drain, and whip with a little butter or olive oil. Serve them as a simple side dish or dress them up with delicious optional add-in's.

    A bowl of bright orange whipped sweet potatoes in a gray bowl with chopped pecans for garnish.

    Don't you love easy recipes with simple ingredients? Whipping sweet potatoes makes them fluffy and creamy without using a potato masher or a food processor (which can make them gummy). Add some butter and seasoning and they're ready. Dress them up for a holiday meal with delicious add-ins to take them up a notch.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • Easy - Just peel, chop, steam, and whip.
    • Simple or dressed up - Add a little butter or sprinkle on some chopped nuts and herbs.
    • Make them ahead - Reheat for easy holiday and weeknight prep.
    • Nutritious - With a of that color, you know they are good for you.

    For another great potatoes side dish, try these air fryer red potatoes.

    Recipe Ingredients

    • Sweet potatoes: Go for the orange fleshed sweet potatoes with reddish skins.
    • Fat of choice: Use either unsalted butter, plant butter, or extra virgin olive oil for no dairy and vegan.
    • Optional garnishes: Chopped pecans, toasted or raw and a little fresh parsley.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements and directions.

    Chef's tip on tools. All you need is a large pot, a steamer rack, a vegetable peeler, and a hand electric mixer. The best peeler for not just sweet potatoes but any vegetable is those inexpensive y-peelers you can buy almost anywhere for about $4.

    Substitutions and Variations

    Try different ways of making whipped sweet potatoes with terrific add-in's such as:

    • For creamier whipped sweet potatoes, add warm cream, half and half, whole milk, sour cream, creme fraiche, canned coconut milk (like cream) or almond milk (for no-dairy).
    • Add extra flavor with flavored olive oil such as white truffle, blood orange, or jalapeno garlic.
    • For a sweeter option, add whipped maple butter or try a little orange juice, a hint of cinnamon, and a little vanilla bean paste.
    • Turn them into a sweet potato casserole by spreading whipped potatoes into a shallow buttered casserole dish and covering the top with chopped easy candied pecans or make a parmesan cheese, breadcrumb, and herb mixture for a more savory flavor.
    • Drizzle a little more melted butter over the top at serving. 

    Another perfect side dish for your Thanksgiving table, enjoy these buttery dutch yellow potatoes. Also simply prepared and easy to make ahead of time.

    Recipe Instructions

    A hand mixer works fine for a recipe to serve 4-6 people with 2-3 pounds of sweet potatoes. For a crowd-sized batch, whip sweet potatoes in the bowl of a stand mixer with a whisk attachment.

    A white cutting board with peeled orange sweet potatoes and their peels.
    Step 1: Peel potatoes.
    Cubed sweet potatoes in a glass bowl with wedges on the cutting board.
    Step 2: Slice the potatoes into planks about ¾" wide them crosswise into ¾" dice (cubes).
    A steamer basket filled with diced orange sweet potatoes.
    Step 3: Add sweet potatoes to a steamer basket and steam, 18-20 minutes until very soft.
    Cooked diced sweet potatoes ready to be whipped or mashed.
    Step 4: Potatoes should be very tender when ready, easily pierced withe the tip of a paring knife.
    Whipping sweet potatoes with a hand mixer until smooth in the cooking pot.
    Step 5: Drain off cooking water and whip hot sweet potatoes with a hand mixer in the same pot, adding butter, salt, pepper, and any add-ins if desired.
    Whipped sweet potatoes ready for serving in a gray bowl.
    Step 6: Whipped sweet potatoes ready for serving with garnishes.

    Chef's tip: Storing sweet potatoes. Sweet potatoes should ideally be stored in a cool, dry, and well-ventilated area like a pantry or a cellar. Not having a cellar, I use my pantry, and store them in an open basket for air flow. Moisture and light encourage spoilage and sprouting so don't refrigerate raw sweet potatoes. Refrigeration may also change the taste and texture.

    Tips for How to Cut Sweet Potatoes

    Large, long and rounded with pointy ends, sweet potatoes can be a challenge to safely cut up for cooking. Here's how to cut sweet potatoes and not cut yourself:

    • Remember, flat surfaces (versus round ones) are your friend.
    • Cut sweet potatoes in half across the middle for a more manageable size.
    • Cut a slice off the long side to give you a flat edge for stability.
    • Lay the sweet potato flat on your cutting board.
    • Cut the potatoes into long planks about a ¾"-1" wide
    • Lay planks flat and cut them into ¾"-1" cubes (large dice).

    Chef's tip: Cooking sweet potatoes. While I used to simmer sweet potatoes until tender, my preferred method now is steaming, because steaming preserves more of the nutrition. Why? In boiling or simmering, nutrients leach into the water and are then tossed down the drain; not so with steaming. There is also less risk with water-logged potatoes and flavor loss.

    Prefer using an air fryer? Try these air fryer sweet potato cubes for a nice side.

    Whipped sweet potatoes ready for serving in a gray bowl.

    Serving and Storage

    Make whipped sweet potatoes a day or two ahead and refrigerate until the day of serving. Get them out of the refrigerator an hour ahead to get the chill off. Re-heat in the oven covered with aluminum foil or on the stove top over low, stirring occasionally so they do not burn or stick on the bottom. They might need a little more milk or butter to loosen up.

    If you are making a big batch for a crowd, keep them warm in a crock pot. Place a clean kitchen towel between the lid and crock top to catch moisture. I did this the years I was catering dinner events and it worked great. Leftovers keep for up to 4 days refrigerated in an airtight container.

    Freezing Leftovers

    For longer storage, freeze leftover mashed sweet potatoes for up to 6 months, labeled and dated.

    To maximize their quality, place them in airtight containers or freezer bags, and consider portioning them for easy use in future meals. Make sure the potatoes are cooled completely before freezing to reduce condensation, which can lead to freezer burn.

    More Holiday Side Dish Recipes

    Looking for side dishes for your holiday or everyday feast? Try thees and be sure to check out this page for more ideas.

    • White bowl of golden browned air fryer red potatoes with rosemary.
      Air Fryer Red Potatoes (or oven roasted)
    • Maple roasted acorn squash slices on a gray platter with pomegranates seeds scattered on top.
      Roasted Acorn Squash
    • A bowl of bright green beans almondine with toasted buttered almonds.
      Fresh Green Beans Almondine Recipe
    • Classic herbed bread stuffing in white casserole ready to serve.
      Gluten-Free Thanksgiving Stuffing Recipe

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make whipped sweet potatoes, please comment and let me know how you liked it. If you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers and I enjoy hearing from you.

    Originally published 10-30-2011, now updated.

    📖 Recipe

    Whipped sweet potatoes ready for serving in a gray bowl.

    Whipped Sweet Potatoes

    Sally Cameron
    Sweet potatoes are a powerhouse vegetable packed with flavor and nutrition. Skip the marshmallows, brown sugar or maple syrup. Whipped sweet potatoes make a healthy side dish any time of the year. Instructions to simmer as well as steam.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 20 minutes mins
    whip time 10 minutes mins
    Total Time 40 minutes mins
    Course Side Dish
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4
    Calories 307 kcal

    Equipment

    • Hand mixer
    • large pot with lid
    • Steamer rack

    Ingredients
      

    • 2 pounds sweet potatoes
    • 3-4 tablespoons unsalted butter or olive oil
    • ½ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black or white pepper
    • 1-2 tablespoons chopped toasted pecans garnish, optional

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Peel Potatoes and Chop

    • Cut sweet potatoes in half crosswise to make them more manageable. Trim a piece from the long side of the sweet potato to create a flat surface. Place the flat surface on the cutting board for stability and cut the potato into planks about ¾″ wide, then cut the planks into the same size diced potatoes.

    To Steam Potatoes

    • Fill a large pot a few inches full of water, enough to reach the bottom edge of your steamer insert. With the lid on, bring water to a boil, add potatoes, and steam until very soft, 18-20 minutes. To test for doneness, pierce with the tip of a sharp paring knife. Potatoes whip more easily and smoothly when very soft but you don't want them water-logged.

    To Simmer Potatoes

    • Place the potatoes into a medium saucepan or pot and cover with cold water. Bring to a simmer over medium heat. Turn down if needed once the potatoes are cooking. You don't want to boil them (they will fall apart). Cook until the potatoes are very soft when pierced with a sharp knife tip, 18-20 minutes.

    Finish and Whip Potatoes

    • Steamed potatoes can be whipped right away. For simmered potatoes, drain and place them back in the pan on the warm (but turned off) burner for a few minutes to reduce excess moisture.
      Whip the potatoes with an electric handheld mixer, adding salt, pepper and butter or olive oil. Start to whip slow and build up the speed to high. Whip until smooth and creamy, adding any dairy, milk, or non-dairy milk if desired. Serve warm.
      Sweet potatoes can also be whipped with an immersion or stick blender, it may take a little longer to get them smooth.
      If potatoes are not completely smooth and there are a few bits of potatoes, they are still great because they are very soft.
    • Make Ahead
    • Potatoes can be made ahead, completely cooled and refrigerated in an airtight container and re-heated to serve in a low oven covered with foil. Re-heat to 165F, testing with an instant-read digital thermometer.

    Notes

    To save time, make the sweet potatoes a day ahead and warm before serving. To heat, place the sweet potatoes in a medium glass or stainless steel bowl over a pan with simmering water. Cover with foil and heat until hot, stirring occasionally. Alternatively place in a warm oven.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 307kcalCarbohydrates: 46gProtein: 4gFat: 12gSaturated Fat: 2gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 9gSodium: 125mgPotassium: 785mgFiber: 7gSugar: 10gVitamin A: 32260IUVitamin C: 8mgCalcium: 77mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    How to Make White Chocolate Mousse

    12/11/2011 by Sally Cameron 7 Comments

    white chocolate peppermint mousse

    Rich and creamy this white chocolate mousse was a holiday favorite at my catered events. Smooth white chocolate, refreshing peppermint, velvety cream cheese, and fluffy whipped cream blend into a luscious mousse that's perfect for the season. Just the right amount to satisfy a post-dinner sweet tooth, this dessert will delight your family and friends. Make it ahead of time for easy serving.

    White chocolate peppermint mousse in white ramekins sprinkled with crushed peppermints.

    This white chocolate mousse is the perfect dessert for holiday celebrations. Luxuriously rich and creamy, it only takes a small serving to satisfy your sweet tooth, making it an ideal finale to a big dinner. Light and elegant, it's just enough indulgence without leaving you feeling too full, and the peppermint flavor is refreshing. Garnish with crushed peppermint candies or sparkly red sprinkles for a festive touch.

    Why You'll Love White Chocolate Mousse

    • It's creamy, rich, and light.
    • Easy to make ahead of time.
    • Great for holiday parties and entertaining.
    • The peppermint is a nice surprise but you make other flavors.
    • No eggs.

    For another creamy mousse recipe, try this easy pumpkin mousse.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    • Butter: Use unsalted butter.
    • White chocolate: My favorite is the 35% Valhrona for the quality and taste. Buy it in blocks or pieces (called feves or discs).
    • Cream: You need heavy whipping cream.
    • Extract: Peppermint extract used for baking and flavoring.
    • Sweetener: Either agave syrup or sugar-free simple syrup
    • Cream cheese: Get the block of cream cheese, full fat, not low fat, not the tub or whipped.
    • Optional Garnishes: Peppermint candies crushed fine (sometimes called peppermint snow) or red sugar sprinkles.

    Here's another one of my favorite dessert recipes, this creamy light lemon mousse.

    Chef's tip: To make your own "peppermint snow" for garnish, place peppermint candies in a zip bag and finely crush with a rolling pin (or buy crushed peppermint candy). Another option is placing them in a food processor and pulsing until it's fine.

    Substitutions and Variations

    Make white chocolate mousse in different flavors.

    • If you don't like peppermint, use vanilla extract and change up the garnish to a different colored sugar sprinkle or even dark chocolate sprinkles or chocolate shavings.
    • Make a white chocolate coconut mousse with coconut extract and toasted coconut for the garnish.
    • Use almond extract and finely chopped toasted almonds.

    For a super easy chocolate mousse, try this 5 minute Chocolate Mousse recipe.

    About White Chocolate

    Is white chocolate really chocolate? It depends on whom you ask. Purists will argue that it's not really chocolate, others argue that it is. White chocolate is made with sugar, cocoa butter, milk products, vanilla and lecithin. White chocolate simply swaps out the cocoa solids of regular dark chocolate for milk solids, and it has lots of cocoa butter.

    White chocolate can be very sweet, and if not good quality, can taste waxy (plastic-y), chalky, and cheap. That's why you've got to get a top quality brand.

    After trying several, my favorite (and it's usually top rated) is the French brand, Valrhona. They make 35% cacao white chocolate (bar or coins) that are sweet and creamy, not waxy. It's available at Whole Foods, better grocers, some cooking stores and online.

    Four white ramekins of white chocolate mousse topped with crushed peppermint candy garnish on a tray.

    Chef's tip: How to create a double boiler. Place a medium saucepan filled with a few inches of water over medium heat. When the water starts to simmer, place a stainless steel or glass bowl on top of the pan. The bottom of the bowl should not touch the water. Why do this? It's a gentle way of melting chocolate and other sensitive ingredients.

    How to Make White Chocolate Mousse

    Step 1: Slowly melt the white chocolate with unsalted butter over a barely simmering double boiler. This gently melts the chocolate and butter. Do it too fast and your chocolate will be grainy.

    Step 2: In a separate bowl whip the heavy cream to stiff peaks. Add the peppermint extract, sweetener, and salt. In the bowl with the cooled white chocolate, add the cream cheese and whip until smooth.

    Step 3: Fold the whipped cream, white chocolate, and cream cheese together by hand with a flexible spatula. Cover the mousse and chill for a few hours to stiffen up before serving if you are piping. Otherwise it can be served soft.

    Serving and Storage

    To serve white chocolate mousse, I use 2 ounce ramekins because it's rich and just a little satisfies a sweet tooth. Sprinkle with the finely crushed peppermint candies or red sugar crystals as a beautiful accent and festive touch.

    White chocolate mousse lasts 3 to 4 days stored in the refrigerator in an airtight container. The mousse's texture may start to lose some of its fluffiness over time, so for the best taste and texture, aim to serve it within 1-2 days at best.

    Recipe FAQs

    Why did my mousse turn out grainy?

    Grainy mousse can happen if the chocolate isn't fully melted or if it's over-mixed with the whipped cream. Be gentle when folding the ingredients to keep the texture smooth.

    How do I get the mousse to set properly?

    Chill the mousse in the fridge for 2-4 hours before serving. This allows it to firm up to the perfect consistency.

    What should I do if my mousse is too thick or heavy?

    Loosen or lighten a heavy mousse by folding in a little more whipped cream or gently stirring in a spoonful of milk. This should help soften the texture.

    How do I prevent the chocolate from seizing?

    Melt it slowly and gently, and keep any moisture or water away from it as it causes chocolate to seize. Be patient with the melting process, and use a double boiler which can be more controllable than the microwave. While it's melting, stir occasionally to keep chocolate from overheating.

    More Decadent Holiday Dessert Recipes

    From lemon to chocolate or vanilla, from rich to light, try some of these decadent desserts.

    • Four lemon posset custard dessert cups topped with fresh berries.
      Easy Lemon Posset Recipe
    • Chocolate Tart With Hazelnut Crust
      Decadent Chocolate Ganache Tart
    • champagne sabayon sauce
      How to Make Sabayon
    • Vanilla bean creme brulee in white ramekins on a wire rack.
      Vanilla Crème Brûlée (Easy No-Stovetop Method)

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make white chocolate mousse, please comment and let me know how you liked it. If you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers and I enjoy hearing from you.

    Originally published 12-11-2011, now updated for you.

    📖 Recipe

    white chocolate peppermint mousse

    White Chocolate Mousse

    Sally Cameron
    White chocolate, peppermint, cream cheese and whipped cream combine for a rich, light textured dessert treat. Piped into two-ounce ramekins, it makes for a small indulgence that's big on satisfaction. Just enough to satisfy the sweet tooth following a holiday meal without being overkill.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 30 minutes mins
    chill time 30 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Servings 6 servings
    Calories 457 kcal

    Equipment

    • Hand mixer
    • Piping bags and tips optional

    Ingredients
      

    Mousse

    • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter
    • 6 ounces white chocolate bar or discs, chopped
    • 1 cup heavy whipping cream well chilled
    • 2 teaspoons peppermint extract
    • 1 tablespoon agave syrup, keto syrup, or simple syrup
    • 1 pinch salt
    • 8 ounces cream cheese at room temperature

    Optional Garnishes

    • Peppermint candies or candy canes crushed fine
    • Red sugar sprinkles

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Set up double boiler

    • Fill a medium saucepan with a few inches of water to set up a double boiler. Place butter and white chocolate in a stainless steel or glass bowl that will fit partially inside the pan. The water should not touch the bottom of the bowl.
      When the water comes to a strong simmer, place the bowl on top and turn the heat down to low.

    Melt the White Chocolate

    • Slowly melt the white chocolate and butter together. It will take just a few minutes. When it's melted together, stir and remove from the heat. Allow to cool.

    Whip the Cream and Cream Cheese

    • In a separate bowl or container whip the cream to stiff peaks. Add the peppermint extract, sweetener, and salt. In the bowl with the cooled white chocolate, add the cream cheese and whip until smooth.

    Finish Mousse

    • Fold the whipped cream, white chocolate, and cream cheese together by hand. Cover and chill for a few hours to stiffen up before serving if you are piping. Otherwise it can be served soft.
      Small 2 ounce ramekins work well. At serving, sprinkle with the peppermint snow. Red sugar crystals are optional for more color.

    Notes

    You can make this a day ahead for easy entertaining.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 457kcalCarbohydrates: 20gProtein: 5gFat: 40gSaturated Fat: 25gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 11gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 99mgSodium: 162mgPotassium: 172mgFiber: 0.1gSugar: 19gVitamin A: 1216IUVitamin C: 0.4mgCalcium: 121mgIron: 0.2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Belgian Endive with Herbed Cream Cheese

    12/27/2011 by Sally Cameron 10 Comments

    Belgian endive leaves filled with herbed cream cheese on a white platter.

    Belgian endive filled with herbed cream cheese makes for an easy, elegant appetizer perfect for holiday gatherings. With fresh, vibrant flavors, these bites offer a lighter, refreshing alternative to richer appetizers with bread, cheese, and meats. Prepare the creamy herb filling ahead of time, then simply fill the endive leaves before serving. If you haven't tried beautiful endive yet, this is the perfect recipe to start!

    Endive leaves stuffed with herbed cream cheese on a white platter.

    When I'm catering parties and my clients want a crudités platter as appetizers, I pair Belgian endive with my version of Green Goddess dip. Here, I'm using cream cheese as the base. The flavors burst with fresh herbs and lemon against the crisp and pleasantly bitter leaves.

    Packed with fresh tarragon, parsley, dill, chives, and a little lemon, pipe the filling into Belgian endive leaves for an elegant presentation. If you can find chervil, that's good too.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • Endive leaves make terrific scoopers for dips and vessels for filling.
    • They light and elegant but different and so tasty.
    • Belgian endive is good for you and comes in both red and white with pale yellowish green edges.

    Here's another cream cheese based dip that works as a filling, my easy smoked salmon dip.

    Recipe Ingredients

    • Belgian endive: Buy large heads, not small ones, and you need more than you think because of how the leaves taper into smaller pieces. Save the small ones for snacking or adding to salads.
    • Cream cheese: Use full fat or light.
    • Shallot: A member of the onion family with great flavor.
    • Sour Cream: Either full fat or low fat, but full fat offers more flavor.
    • Mayonnaise: Use your favorite.
    • Lemon: You need both zest and juice.
    • Herbs: Fresh tarragon, dill, parsley, and chives. Stay with the softer herb varieties.
    • Anchovy paste: Honestly, it's not fishy in the recipe but adds a salty depth of flavor. The tube stuff is different than anchovy fillets. Optional (but be brave).

    For measurements, salt and pepper (black pepper or white pepper), please see the recipe card.

    Chef's note: What is endive? Prized around the world, endive is the elegant member of the chicory family. This family includes escarole and curly endive, most often used for salad greens. For more information, check out the Discover Endive website.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • To add more flavor try garnishing with crisply crumbled bacon or smoked salmon. A sprinkle of pomegranate arils is festive, offering tasty variations.
    • For vegan and non-dairy needs, substitute a plant-based cream cheese, sour cream, and vegan mayonnaise such as Vegenaise or Sir Kensington.
    Endive leaves stuffed with herbed cream cheese.

    Recipe Instructions

    • Set the cream cheese out to soften for at least and hour or two. It will be easier to blend when soft.
    • Chop the shallot and herbs.
    • When the cream cheese is soft, place all ingredients in a bowl and mix well until smooth with a whisk or flexible spatula. You can also use a food processor.
    • Taste and adjust the seasoning with salt and white pepper.

    You can use ground black pepper but the white disappears nicely in this recipe. Make the cream cheese filling a few hours ahead or a day or two ahead of time.

    Stuffed endive appetizer.

    Serving Suggestions

    To make Belgian endive leaves look like the photos, use a disposable piping bag and a large star piping tip or plain piping tip.

    For an easier, more casual presentation, spoon cream cheese filling into a bowl to use as a dip. If the cream cheese filling is too stiff to scoop, thin it with a little milk until is it scoop-able. Serve with the endive leaves or raw veggies and crackers. Spread it on a sandwich or use it in a wrap, like this turkey wrap.

    The herbed cream cheese will last 4-5 days in the refrigerator well covered.

    Recipe FAQs

    How do I prevent the endive leaves from browning?

    Trim the endive leave ends just before serving to avoid browning, and keep the leaves chilled until use.

    Can I make this dairy-free?

    Yes, use a plant-based cream cheese instead of dairy cream cheese, vegan sour cream, and a vegan mayonnaise for dairy-free stuffed Belgian endive leaves.

    Can I assemble the appetizers in advance?

    Fill the leaves shortly before serving to keep them crisp and prevent the filling from softening the leaves.

    How many endive leaves should I plan per person?

    It depends on what else you are serving for appetizers or snacks. Plan for about 3 leaves per person. If this is a part of a big appetizer buffet, maybe two per person.

    More Terrific Appetizer Recipes

    Whether you are looking for dip recipes or something a bit more, check out these recipes and the appetizer recipes index page for lots more ideas!

    • A white bowl of roasted red pepper hummus to serve as an appetizer.
      Roasted Red Bell Pepper Hummus Recipe
    • Closeup of mushroom pate in a white ramekin with a spoon.
      Classic French Mushroom Duxelle
    • Close up of creamy basil and avocado dip in white bowl.
      Avocado Dip with Yogurt and Fresh Basil
    • Spinach stuffed mushrooms on a gray serving plate with melted parmesan on top, with parsley.
      Spinach Stuffed Mushrooms With Parmesan Cheese

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make Belgian endive stuffed with herbed cream cheese, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    green goddess stuffed endive leaves | afoodcentriclife.com

    Belgian endive with herbed cream cheese

    Sally Cameron
    Based on the flavors of classic Green Goddess salad dressing, this filling or dip is packed with the flavors of fresh herbs and lemon in a base of cream cheese. For a dip, thin with low fat milk to the desired consistency, or thinner to become salad dressing.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Total Time 15 minutes mins
    Course Appetizer
    Cuisine American
    Servings 6 servings
    Calories 224 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • 8 ounces  cream cheese at room temp, softened
    • 1 tablespoon finely chopped shallot
    • ¼ cup sour cream
    • ¼ cup Mayonnaise or Vegenaise
    • 1 lemon, zested
    • 1 tablespoon lemon juice
    • 2 tablespoons fresh chopped tarragon
    • 2 tablespoons fresh chopped dill plus extra for garnish if desired
    • 2 tablespoons fresh chopped Italian parsley
    • 1 tablespoon finely chopped chives
    • ½ teaspoon anchovy paste optional
    • ½ teaspoon kosher or sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper or white pepper
    • 4-6 heads Belgian endive depending on size

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • In a medium bowl, mix all ingredients together until smooth. Refrigerate until needed. Taste and adjust to your preferences.  It's best made a few hours or a day ahead so the flavors have time to meld and develop.
    • When well chilled, place filling into a piping bag with a star or French tip. Trim the stem end of the endive leaves and carefully peel the leaves off of the base of the head so you have individual leaves. Place on a platter and fill from the piping bag. Alternatively, spoon the filing into a small bowl or ramekin and serve the endive leaves and crackers around it for guests to help themselves.

    Notes

    • Add more flavor try garnishing with crisply crumbled bacon or smoked salmon. A sprinkle of pomegranate arils is festive, offering tasty variations.
    • For vegan and non-dairy needs, substitute a plant-based cream cheese, sour cream, and vegan mayonnaise such as Vegenaise or Sir Kensington.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 224kcalCarbohydrates: 6gProtein: 4gFat: 21gSaturated Fat: 9gCholesterol: 47mgSodium: 441mgPotassium: 218mgFiber: 1gSugar: 2gVitamin A: 819IUVitamin C: 5mgCalcium: 85mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Mushroom Tomato Sauce

    01/22/2012 by Sally Cameron 5 Comments

    mushroom marinara pasta sauce

    Rich and hearty, you will never guess this mushroom tomato sauce has no meat. Big umami flavors from the mushroom and tomatoes plus lots of fresh herbs makes for a delicious pasta sauce over any type of pasta. I make double batches and freeze it in jars, always handy for a quick and satisfying dinner. Love mushrooms? You'll love this sauce.

    Rich and hearty pasta sauce with mushrooms over fettuccine noodles in a white bowl.

    Parsley is often relegated to the role of supporting actor as simple garnish. In this mushroom tomato sauce, parsley plays a foundational role. The parsley lends fresh herbal flavor to this meatless but meaty-tasting sauce filled with mushrooms, tomatoes, garlic, onion, celery and herbs.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • A hearty, meaty mushroom sauce for pasta without meat.
    • Make it ahead and freeze it.
    • Full of mushrooms, herbs, and tomatoes, for big flavors.

    An added benefit, parsley is good for you! For your immune system, digestion and more.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Your shopping list for mushroom spaghetti sauce:

    • Olive oil: For flavor and sautéing.
    • Parsley: Use Italian parsley, curly parsley, or a combination. Be sure it's really fresh and bright green.
    • Onion: The flavorful, aromatic base for soups, sauce, and many dishes. White, brown, or yellow onions.
    • Celery: Helps develop a savory depth of flavor.
    • Garlic: A must for flavorful pasta sauce. Fresh is best but the tube in a tube is pretty good.
    • Mushrooms: Buy either common white mushrooms or brown mushrooms.
    • Tomatoes: Both canned crushed tomatoes and tomato puree.
    • Dried herbs: dried basil and dried oregano, or use a dried Italian herb blend.
    • Wine: Either dry red or dry white wine, or for no wine use water or broth.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements and salt, pepper and red pepper flakes.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Use fresh herbs instead of the dried.

    Recipe Instructions

    For faster prep work, a food processor comes in handy. If you have one but don't use it much, here is your chance to put it to use. No food processor? Prep the vegetables by hand with a chef's knife.

    Step 1: Strip leaves from two to three large bunches of parsley, discarding the stems. Wash parsley leaves in cool water and dry on layers of paper towels, kitchen towels or in a salad spinner.

    Step 2: Chop the parsley fine in a food processor with the steel knife. The trick is to drop the dry herbs in through the feed tube while the machine is running. If chopping by hand, totally dry herbs chop easier than wet or damp herbs.

    Step 3: Add roughly chopped onion and celery to the parsley in the work bowl and pulse to chop, or chop buy hand. Remove to a medium bowl. Change out the food processor attachment to a slicing blade and slice the mushrooms. Remove the sliced mushrooms and add to the bowl.

    Sliced mushrooms and chopped herbs in a large pot cooking for pasta sauce.

    Step 4: Once your prep work is done, the sauce is easy to complete by simmering the ingredients in a pot until thick and the flavors are melded together.

    Serving Suggestions

    Serve mushroom tomato sauce simply over your favorite noodles for an easy, healthy dinner. It's tasty over spaghetti squash noodles too.

    Use it to top stuffed pasta shells or over crisp chicken cutlets for a twist on my easy Chicken Parmesan. It's a versatile sauce, and extra freezes well.

    Pasta in a white bowl topped with mushroom marinara on a dinner table.

    📖 Recipe

    mushroom marinara |afoodcentriclife.com

    Mushroom Tomato Sauce

    Sally Cameron
    Meaty-tasting but meatless, mushrooms take the place of meat in this hearty pasta sauce. Add lots of fresh parsley for fresh herbal flavor, tomatoes, garlic, onions and herbs. Use it to top pasta or crisp chicken cutlets with a side of broccolini. Make extra as it freezes well.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 20 minutes mins
    Cook Time 45 minutes mins
    Course Sauce
    Cuisine Italian
    Servings 8
    Calories 59 kcal

    Equipment

    • Food Processor or do it all by hand with a chef's knife.

    Ingredients
      

    • 2 tablespoons olive oil
    • 1 ½ cups finely chopped parsley leaves about 2 large, full bunches
    • ½ medium onion chopped fine
    • 3 celery ribs chopped fine
    • 2-3 garlic cloves chopped fine
    • 8 ounces white or brown mushrooms cleaned and thinly sliced
    • 1 28 ounce canned crushed tomatoes
    • 1 28 ounce canned tomato puree
    • 1 teaspoon dried basil
    • 1 teaspoon dried oregano
    • 1 teaspoon salt kosher or sea
    • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
    • ¼ teaspoon dried red pepper
    • ½ cup dry red wine or white wine or water

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • In a large pot, heat the oil over medium heat. When the oil is hot, add the parsley, onion and celery. Cook until soft, stirring occasionally. Add the garlic and cook for one more minute. Add the mushrooms, tomatoes, and herbs, salt, peppers and wine. Simmer covered until all of the flavors are incorporated, about 40 - 45 minutes. If it gets too thick, add a little water to thin it to your preference.
      Serve mushroom pasta sauce over pasta of choice. Extra keeps in an airtight container for up to 5 days in the refrigerator or freezes well for several months.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 59kcalCarbohydrates: 3gProtein: 1gFat: 4gSaturated Fat: 1gSodium: 301mgPotassium: 163mgFiber: 1gSugar: 1gIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Stuffed Portobello Mushrooms

    06/05/2012 by Sally Cameron 35 Comments

    stuffed portobello mushrooms with goat cheese and tomatoes

    Stuffed portobello mushrooms are hearty, savory, and satisfying enough to serve as a vegetarian main dish. Large mushroom caps are filled with sweet roasted tomatoes, creamy goat cheese, garlic, herbs, and a splash of balsamic, then baked until tender. Serve them on a party platter, with a green salad for a meatless dinner, or alongside roasted steak, chicken, or pork for a bright, savory side.

    Suffed portabello mushroom with tomatoes and goat cheese on cloth napkins.

    While working in a steakhouse kitchen, I learned a simple prep trick for large portobello mushrooms: trim the tough stems and gently scrape out the dark gills to create a neat cavity for filling. I brought that technique home and built this recipe around it, filling the mushrooms with oven-roasted tomatoes, tangy goat cheese, garlic, and fresh herbs, then baking them until tender and savory.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Stuffed Portobello Mushrooms Recipe Snapshot

    • Meaty, no meat - Umami-rich portobello caps have steak-like heft, making them a satisfying vegetarian main or hearty appetizer.
    • Make-ahead friendly - Stuff ahead and refrigerate, then bake when guests arrive for stress-free timing.
    • Beautiful presentation - Big stuffed portobellos look gorgeous on a platter with minimal effort and disappear fast.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    These oversized stuffed mushrooms are so good, and the prep is simple once you know how to clean the caps and create space for the filling.

    • Portobello mushrooms - Use large, firm caps about 4 inches across.
    • Tomatoes - Oven-roasted tomatoes add rich, concentrated flavor, but fresh tomatoes work too.
    • Oil - Use extra virgin olive oil or avocado oil.
    • Lemon juice - Adds bright acidity for balance.
    • Shallot - Adds subtle sweetness and savory depth.
    • Garlic - Fresh garlic adds aromatic flavor.
    • Goat cheese - Use plain or herbed goat cheese.
    • Fresh herbs - Thyme, parsley, and chives add fresh flavor and color.

    Chef's tip - What are Portobello Mushrooms? Portobello mushrooms, sometimes spelled portabella, are mature cremini mushrooms - the same mushroom, just larger. Their dark brown caps, usually about 4 inches across, have a deep, earthy aroma and meaty texture that stands up well to stuffing. Unlike smaller mushrooms, portobellos are sold with exposed gills. I scrape them out because a clean cavity makes a neater, more appetizing vessel for the filling.

    Substitutions and Variations

    All of these variations have so much flavor, so be creative and do what sounds good. Next time, try one of these:

    • Short on time - Use chopped fresh tomatoes or chopped sun-dried tomatoes instead of oven-roasted tomatoes.
    • Cheese swap - Replace goat cheese with mozzarella and spoon a little marinara over the top before baking for a pizza-style stuffed mushroom.
    • Add protein - Stir in cooked, crumbled Italian sausage, or finely chop cooked sausage links for better texture.
    • Add greens - Fold in chopped fresh spinach or baby arugula for color and freshness.
    • Make them vegan - swap the goat cheese for a herbed cashew cheese or a seasoned tofu-ricotta and add nutritional yeast for extra savory flavor.

    Chef's Tip: Why Remove the Gills?
    Scraping out the dark gills creates more room for filling and gives the stuffed mushrooms a cleaner, more appetizing look. A small spoon works perfectly.

    How to Make Stuffed Portobello Mushrooms

    Start by cleaning the mushrooms. Gather your ingredients.

    How to Clean Portobello Mushrooms

    • Wipe the outside of each mushroom cap with a damp paper towel to remove any surface dirt.
    • Remove the stem by gently pushing it side to side until it pops out. Trim any remaining tough bits with a paring knife so the inside of the cap is flat.
    • Discard the stems or save them for mushroom broth and freeze until you have enough.
    • Use a teaspoon to gently scrape out the dark brown gills from the inside of each cap, creating a clean cavity for the filling.
    Cleaning the mushroom caps of gills.

    Stuff Portobellos and Bake

    Brush with olive oil, broil for a few minutes, then fill with roasted tomatoes, crumbled goat cheese and herbs. Place on a rimmed baking sheet lined with parchment paper in a single layer and bake for about 12 minutes.

    Hot to Make Roasted Tomatoes

    A baking tray of fresh cherry tomatoes ready for the oven.

    Make these ahead to save time. Find the recipe for the oven roasted tomatoes here. They take about 25 minutes and will last a few days in the fridge. You need a pound of cherry or grape tomatoes, fresh thyme, olive oil, salt, and pepper. For exact ingredients see the bottom of the recipe card.

    Slice the tomatoes in half, place in a medium bowl and toss with the olive oil, garlic and lots of fresh chopped thyme. Roast on a rimmed baking sheet covered with parchment paper and roast 25 minutes

    A white bowl of red and gold roasted cherry tomatoes with fresh thyme leaves.

    Serving Stuffed Portobello Mushrooms

    • Serve over cooked quinoa, brown rice or a wild rice blend, or cauliflower rice to turn the mushrooms into a complete meal.
    • Serve as a vegetarian main course with a simple green salad and crusty gluten-free bread.
    • Pair with grilled or roasted steak, pork chops, chicken, or salmon for a hearty vegetable side dish.
    • Drizzle with homemade pesto just before serving for a fresh basil finish that complements the goat cheese and tomatoes beautifully.
    • Finish with a little balsamic glaze and extra fresh herbs for an easy appetizer or party platter.

    Leftovers

    Refrigerate leftover stuffed portobello mushrooms in an airtight container for up to 3 days. Reheat gently in a 350°F oven until warmed through for the best texture. Microwaving can make them soggy. Stuffed portobellos do not freeze well.

    More Recipes With Mushrooms

    Need more of a reason to eat mushrooms? Try these!

    • Spinach stuffed mushrooms on a gray serving plate with melted parmesan on top, with parsley.
      Spinach Stuffed Mushrooms With Parmesan Cheese
    • steakhouse roasted mushrooms
      Sauteed Mushrooms and Onions
    • A gray bowl of chunky leek mushroom soup with a spoon beside bowl.
      Creamy Leek and Mushroom Soup Recipe
    • Closeup of mushroom pate in a white ramekin with a spoon.
      Classic French Mushroom Duxelle

    Did You Make This?

    If you make stuffed portobello mushrooms, please let me know by leaving a comment. I love hearing from you, and your comments help other readers too.

    📖 Recipe

    Stuffed Portobello Mushrooms | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Stuffed Portobello Mushrooms

    Sally Cameron
    These giant, meaty mushrooms make a terrific appetizer (½ per person) or meatless main dish (1 per person). The oven roasted tomatoes, goat cheese and herbs add to their earthy, savory flavor. For a more substantial meal, add a green salad. See notes in post for more ideas. Make the roast tomatoes ahead or while you are prepping the mushrooms. They take about 25 minutes. For variations see post.
    5 from 3 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 20 minutes mins
    Total Time 35 minutes mins
    Course Appetizer, Mushrooms, Side Dish
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4 to 8
    Calories 200 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 recipe of oven roasted tomatoes LINK BELOW
    • 4 large Portobello mushrooms about 4″ across
    • 3 tablespoons olive oil
    • 1 tablespoon lemon juice
    • 2 teaspoon finely chopped shallot optional
    • 1 large garlic clove finely chopped
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt to taste
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
    • 4 ounces plain goat cheese

    Optional Garnishes

    • 1 tablespoon fresh chopped parsley
    • 1 tablespoon fresh chopped chives
    • 4 teaspoons Balsamic vinegar

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Roast Tomatoes (can be made ahead)

    • If you have not made the oven roasted tomatoes ahead, do them first. They take just a few minutes of prep time and 20-25 minutes in the oven.

    Prep Mushrooms

    • While the tomatoes are roasting, clean the mushrooms by gently wiping the outside of the caps with a damp paper towel or brushing any dirt off with a soft brush. Next, pop out the stems by pushing them from side to side until the snap out. Then with a teaspoon, scrape the gills out until the underside is mostly clean. Place them on a foil lined rimmed baking sheet.
    • Whisk together the olive oil, lemon juice, shallot and garlic. Brush mushroom caps inside and out with the olive oil mixture (or plain olive oil). Sprinkle each cap with salt and pepper.

    Broil Mushrooms

    • Pre-heat the broiler. With the oven rack on the second to the top level, broil the mushrooms for 3-5 minutes until they are hot and the edges are starting to brown. They will start to release moisture and get juicy. Remove from the oven.

    Bake Mushrooms

    • Pre-heat the oven to 375 (190C). Fill the caps with the roasted tomatoes and dot with the goat cheese. Sprinkle with the fresh herbs. Bake for 12 minutes or until hot and the cheese has softened. Brush with a little extra olive oil on the edges to make them shine. Serve.

    Notes

    The recipe link for the oven roasted tomatoes is here

    Nutrition

    Calories: 200kcalCarbohydrates: 6gProtein: 8gFat: 17gSaturated Fat: 6gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 9gTrans Fat: 0.003gCholesterol: 13mgSodium: 265mgPotassium: 457mgFiber: 2gSugar: 4gVitamin A: 688IUVitamin C: 16mgCalcium: 53mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Low Sodium Vegetable Broth

    01/13/2013 by Sally Cameron 24 Comments

    Golden homemade broth on a counter with onions, carrots, celery, and parsley.

    Learn how to make fresh, flavorful low sodium vegetable broth at home for superior results every time. Why settle for store-bought boxes, cans, or cubes loaded with high sodium and artificial flavors when you can whip up a healthier, tastier alternative in an hour? With easy-to-follow instructions for both the Instant Pot and stovetop, you'll have a versatile, nutrient-packed broth perfect for soups, stews, and more. Say goodbye to off flavors and hello to homemade goodness made from wholesome, simple ingredients.

    Golden homemade broth on a counter with onions, carrots, celery, and parsley.

    My low sodium vegetable broth takes minutes in an Instant Pot or pressure cooker, and 30-45 minutes on the stove top. Use it anywhere you use broth. It's great in soups and stews, risotto, and for cooking rice and quinoa. Make a batch and freeze it in portions. Skip the sodium and add the salt that you want to the final recipe for more control.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love Low Sodium Vegetable Broth

    • Easy to make with superior results to store bought stuff.
    • Make it on the stovetop or Instant Pot.
    • Great for soups, rice, risotto, and sipping.
    • No salt added.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    • Water: Use filtered water for the cleanest, healthiest vegetable broth.
    • Tomatoes: Large fresh red tomatoes add color and flavor
    • Onion: Yellow or brown onions work well. Skip red onions unless you want a pink or red broth.
    • Garlic: Get a whole head of garlic (optional).
    • Mushrooms: Either white or brown fresh mushrooms, also help to deepen the flavor and add "umami" as do the tomatoes.
    • Carrots: Large orange carrots. Buy them with the tops on for fresher carrots.
    • Leeks: Green tops from 2 leeks, save the white part to cook with or use 1 whole leek.
    • Celery: Fresh ribs, no leaves.
    • Bay leaf: Adds depth of flavor, fresh or dried.
    • Herbs: Fresh parsley and fresh thyme.
    • Pepper: Dried black whole peppercorns.

    For more terrific broth recipes try my roasted turkey broth, Instant Pot chicken broth, or chicken bone broth.

    Chef's tip: Why make vegetable broth? Read labels on store brands of vegetable broth. Some contain high fructose corn syrup, partially hydrogenated oils, sugar, high sodium levels, dextrose, yeast extract, hydrolyzed soy protein, and flavor-enhancing food additives, MSG and mystery flavorings. Some are made from powdered vegetables. This is why I make homemade vegetable broth!

    Recipe Instructions

    First choose your method: stovetop or Instant Pot. Both take and hour or less.

    Instant Pot Method

    Step 1: Add water and all ingredients to the pressure cooker. Choose the broth setting and set for 15 minutes. Lock the lid on and start.

    Step 2: When time is up, hit the cancel button and use the natural pressure release method, allowing pressure to decrease gradually, giving the vegetables more time to infuse their flavors into the broth. It also prevents splattering or mess when dealing with hot liquid.

    If you're short on time, allow a natural release for 15-20 minutes then manually turn the vent to open and release the pressure being very careful of hot splattering broth. Put a towel over the top.

    Stovetop Method

    For stovetop method simply add the water, all vegetables, herbs, and peppercorns to a large pot, bring almost to a boil, turn down the heat to simmer and cook for 30-45 minutes. Do not cook longer to avoid bitter broth.

    Strain off the broth and chill vegetable broth in an ice bath in the sink. When cool, package and freeze in portions if desired.

    Golden homemade vegetable broth

    Chef's tip: Never add salt to broth when cooking; add it to the dish you are preparing when cooking for the best control and seasoning.

    Homemade Vegetable Broth| A FoodCentricLife.com

    How to Use low Sodium Vegetable Broth

    Use vegetable broth wherever you would use another broth, such as chicken broth, or water.

    • Swap vegetable broth for water when cooking rice or quinoa for more flavor and nutrition.
    • Make terrific risotto!
    • Use in soups, stews, casseroles, wherever broth is called for.

    NOTE! Remember, if you taste the broth after cooling it may taste bland as it has no salt. To sip and taste, add a little salt, as you would for whatever dish you are using the broth in. 

    Storage

    Vegetable broth lasts up to 5 days in the refrigerator and 3-6 months in the freezer. Be sure to label and date your containers. I love to freeze broth in these silicone molds. Store the broth in them until needed or pop the frozen cubes out and place in a freezer-safe bag.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I add salt to my broth?

    Do not add salt so you can add the right amount of salt to the final dish the broth is going in to. Any chef will tell you, the general rule is never salt homemade broths.

    Should I peel the vegetables?

    No need to peel vegetables like carrots or tomatoes. Be sure all vegetables are thoroughly clean. The peels add nutrition and flavor. Onion skins add color to the vegetable broth (but no flavor) so use them. Skip celery leaves as some people find them bitter.

    Can I use vegetable scraps?

    Vegetables scraps are usable for vegetable broth. Save them as you cook in the refrigerator or freezer. Be sure they are clean and fresh. Don't use them if they are beyond usable. You want quality broth, not broth made with junk. You can also add scraps in to the fresh veggies you are using.

    More Broth Recipes

    Homemade broth is so much better than store bought. so if you've never made them, give them a try! It's worth the effort and they freeze beautifully. I always have a freezer full.

    • Rich brown roasted turkey broth in glass jars on a kitchen counter.
      Turkey Broth Recipe
    • Instant pot chicken broth
      Instant Pot Chicken Bone Broth
    • Golden chicken bone broth in glass jars with carrots, celery, and parsley, cooling on the counter.
      Chicken Bone Broth (Homemade)

    Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make vegetable broth, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Homemade Vegetable Broth| A FoodCentricLife.com

    Low Sodium Vegetable Broth (Instant Pot or Stove Top)

    Sally Cameron
    Homemade vegetable broth beats anything from the store hands down, in terms of not only taste, but nutrition. For speed, use a pressure cooker. If you don't have a pressure cooker, simmer 30-45 minutes to an hour then strain and cool. For the leeks and fennel, just use the top portion and save the white part and bottoms for your regular cooking. Make thrifty use of something you might normally discard.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 12 hours hrs 7 minutes mins
    Total Time 12 hours hrs 12 minutes mins
    Course Broth
    Cuisine American
    Servings 12 Yield 3 quarts
    Calories 38 kcal

    Equipment

    • large pot or Instant Pot or other electric pressure cooker

    Ingredients
      

    • 3 quarts filtered water
    • 2 large fresh tomatoes chopped into large chunks
    • 1 head garlic cut in half across the center
    • ½ pound fresh mushrooms rinsed and cut in quarters
    • 4 large carrots with skin scrubbed clean and roughly chopped
    • 2 green tops from 2 leeks save the bottoms to cook with or use 1 whole leek
    • 3 celery ribs roughly chopped
    • 1 medium onion with skin roughly chopped
    • 1 bay leaf fresh or dried
    • ½ bunch fresh parsley
    • ½ bunch fresh thyme
    • 1 teaspoon dried black peppercorns

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Instant Pot method

    • In a 6 quart pressure cooker, add the water and all ingredients. Lock the pressure cooker lid on, close the vent, and set to the broth mode for 15 minutes. When done, hit cancel and allow a natural pressure release. After 20 minutes you can manually release any remaining pressure.
    • Strain and chill
    • Strain broth from spent vegetables through a sieve or mesh colander. Set up an ice bath in the sink with cold water and lots of ice. Place the broth back in the pot and chill the broth until at 70°F or below before refrigerating or freezing.

    Stovetop Method

    • Add water and all ingredients to a large pot and bring to just under a boil. Turn heat down and simmer broth for 30-45 minutes. Follow directions above for straining and chilling.

    Notes

    Vegetable notes:
    • No need to peel carrots or tomatoes, and use the onion skins as well. 
    • Do not add vegetables such as brussels sprouts, broccoli, kale, or cabbage as they can make the broth bitter.
    To intensify the flavor of a light vegetable broth, place double what you need in a small pot and reduce by half. 
    Remember, if you taste the broth after cooling it may taste bland as it has no salt! To sip and taste, add a little salt, as you would for whatever dish you are using the broth in. 

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1cupCalories: 38kcalCarbohydrates: 8gProtein: 2gFat: 0.3gSaturated Fat: 0.05gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.1gMonounsaturated Fat: 0.02gSodium: 37mgPotassium: 280mgFiber: 2gSugar: 3gVitamin A: 4725IUVitamin C: 13mgCalcium: 40mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Orange Creme Brulee

    02/11/2013 by Sally Cameron 1 Comment

    orange ginger creme brulee

    Orange crème brûlée takes the classic French custard dessert to a whole new level. With its smooth, creamy texture and signature caramelized sugar top, this version is infused with fresh orange zest and a hint of ginger for a flavorful twist. If you're looking for a unique take on crème brûlée, this orange crème brûlée recipe is easy to make and irresistibly delicious. Let me show you how to create this citrusy spin on a timeless favorite.

    orange ginger creme brulee

    Focusing on a healthy diet doesn't mean giving up desserts like creme brulee. Keep it for special occasions and keep the portions small. Another tip, use big flavors so that just a few bites will satisfy. Once you find out creme brulee is easily made at home, it's fun to make for holidays and celebrations to wow your family and friends.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • A tasty twist on a classic (instead of vanilla).
    • A mini size is a small indulgence.
    • Easy if you follow my directions.

    If you love the flavor of orange, try this easy orange almond cake.

    Recipe Ingredients

    • Heavy whipping cream: A high butterfat content is needed for making a custard. Also called heavy cream. They are the same. Look for the word "heavy" on the label, not just cream.
    • Sugar: You need regular sugar to sweeten the custard and coarse turbinado or Demerara sugar to "brulee' or burn the top to serve.
    • Grated orange zest: For a bright citrus flavor.
    • Ginger: Use finely grate fresh ginger or the jarred ginger.
    • Eggs: You only need the yolks, which sets the custard. Save the whites for cookies, frittatas, or other recipes.

    Please see recipe card for measurements and details.

    Chef's tip: Heavy whipping cream vs. whipping cream: what's the difference? Heavy whipping cream is richer, containing no less than 36% butterfat. On the other hand, whipping cream (no 'heavy' on the label) has a slightly lower fat content, 30-36%. Some dairies or creameries make their heavy whipping cream up to 40%, which is extra rich.

    Recipe Instructions

    Combine heavy cream and sugar in a small pan. Heat and whisk to melt the sugar. Infuse the cream with lots of fresh orange zest and ginger for 30 minutes. Strain out the zest and ginger. Whisk warm, flavored cream with egg yolks.

    Creme brulee in water bath

    Line a large flat baking dish with a folded kitchen towel. The towel keeps the ramekins stable. Place ramekins on top of the towel in a flat layer and do not crowd them. Pour liquid custard into 2 ounce ramekins. Pour boiling hot water half way up the ramekins. This is called a water bath. It ensures gentle, even baking for a smooth, luscious custard.

    Orange Ginger Cremem Brulee|AFoodCentricLife.com

    Bake custard in a 300 degree (149 C) for approximately 35 minutes, or until the centers are just set and just a little bit wiggly. The best way to test is with a digital thermometer. It should register 170 degrees (76 C) . Don't worry about the little hole that the thermometer might leave. Your sugar will cover it. Cool, cover and refrigerate for up to 3 days.

    How to burn creme brulee|AFoodCentricLife.com

    Use a Blow Torch

    To burn the sugar top, the best tool is a blow torch, because it melts the sugar quickly without warming the chilled custard. What I've found works best is a torch that locks onto a butane can. Skip the mini, underpowered ones from cooking stores.

    The Best Sugar for Creme Brulee

    To create the "brulee" or burnt top, you need a coarse, golden brown sugar.  Look for either demerara or turbinado sugar.

    Remove ramekins from the refrigerator. Blot any condensation on top of the custards with the edge of a paper towel. Put about a 2 teaspoons of sugar on each custard and tap it to cover completely. Pout off the excess sugar for a thin coating.

    Light your torch and slowly move it over the sugar. If the sugar starts to burn to quickly pull back a bit. Start with a lower setting, not as intense of a flame, and don't get too close. When you have completed burning all of the sugar tops, serve and enjoy!

    For a classic vanilla Creme Brulee recipe, try this one. And if you love the flavor of orange, try this orange almond cake. It's so easy and made in one pan.

    orange ginger creme brulee|AFoodCentricLife.com

    📖 Recipe

    Orange Ginger Creme Brulee| A FoodCentricLife.com

    Orange Creme Brulee

    Sally Cameron
    Even if you focus on a healthy diet, enjoying creme brulee is still possible. Reserve it for special occasions and try this mini size. A 2 ounce portion is just enough to satisfy after dinner. I've infused the custard with the bold flavors of fresh orange and ginger. You can make these up to 3 days ahead and keep refrigerated until serving. Burn the tops with sugar before serving.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 45 minutes mins
    Cook Time 35 minutes mins
    Chill 4 hours hrs
    Total Time 5 hours hrs 20 minutes mins
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine French
    Servings 8 servings
    Calories 305 kcal

    Equipment

    • 2 ounce ramekins
    • kitchen blow torch

    Ingredients
      

    • 2 cups heavy cream
    • ⅓ cup organic sugar
    • 1 pinch salt
    • 1 ½ tablespoons fresh grated orange zest
    • 1 tablespoon organic ginger puree or fresh finely grated ginger
    • 6 large egg yolks
    • 4 tablespoons demerara or turbinado sugar

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Pre-heat the oven to 300 degrees with the rack in the center. Put a full kettle on to boil water for a water bath.
    • In a medium pan, combine the cream, sugar and salt. Bring to almost a boil and turn down to low immediately, whisking to dissolve the sugar. Add the grated orange zest and ginger. Remove the pan from the heat and allow the flavors to infuse for 30 minutes.
    • In a medium bowl, whisk egg yolks until smooth. Strain the cream through a fine sieve into the bowl with the yolks and stir to combine. Discard any leftover solids left in the sieve. To fill easily fill ramekins, pour liquid custard into a 4-cup measuring cup with a pouring spout.
    • Line a large, shallow baking dish with a folded kitchen towel. Place ramekins flat on the towel. Don't crowd them. Fill the ramekins with the cream mixture. Move the dish to the oven rack. Carefully pour enough hot water around the ramekins to come up half way on their sides. Slowly and carefully slide the rack into the oven.
    • Bake custards for approximately 35 minutes or until a digital thermometer registers 170 degrees in the center. The center of the custards will just be a little wiggly but set.
    • Remove the custards to a wire rack and cool completely. Cover with plastic film and refrigerate overnight or for about 4 hours to totally chill.
    • To finish and serve, remove custards from the refrigerator and uncover. Blot any excess moisture that has pooled on top. Sprinkle with coarse sugar and tap to get an even, thin coating. Burn tops with a torch to caramelize the sugar into a golden crust. Serve.

    Notes

    To burn the sugar top, the best tool is a blow torch, because it melts the sugar quickly without warming the chilled custard. What I've found works best is a torch that locks onto a butane can. Skip the mini, underpowered ones from cooking stores.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 305kcalCarbohydrates: 17gProtein: 3gFat: 25gSaturated Fat: 15gCholesterol: 220mgSodium: 34mgPotassium: 66mgFiber: 1gSugar: 14gVitamin A: 1059IUVitamin C: 2mgCalcium: 57mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    The Best Gluten Free Banana Bread

    04/23/2013 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

    Gluten free banana bread

    Who doesn't love banana bread? It's a much loved classic recipe for good reason. But if you you eat gluten-free, you need a new recipe. Here is my modern recipe for the best gluten free banana bread.

    gluten-free banana bread | Afoodcentriclife.com

    Remembering my mom and all of the baking we did together, I overhauled her 1950's banana bread recipe. Out with the white flour, refined white sugar and nasty partially hydrogenated fat. In with gluten-free flour, coconut sugar and coconut oil. What a difference 50 years makes.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Gluten-free Flours

    There are many options for gluten-free flours: buy a gluten-free blend or make your own blend. I tested this recipe with both pre-blended and home-blended flours. You cannot go wring either way.

    See notes at the end of the recipe card.

    Branded Blends

    For a purchased blend, I use Bob's Red Mill 1:1 Baking Flour (blue bag) with great results. I've also tried their All-Purpose GF flour blend and a brand called Cup 4 Cup. Each blend is a bit different (read the ingredient label) so your results might be a little different based upon your choice.

    The flavor is great, tender crumb, slices beautifully.

    Blending Your Own (option)

    For the adventurous, creating your own blend requires teff flour, sweet rice flour, brown rice flour and sorghum flour plus cornstarch.

    The difference? This loaf has a rich brown, almost chocolaty color, a tender crust, slices nicely and tastes fantastic. I realize you've got to love baking to do this version but I wanted to include it as an option.

    You'll need a digital kitchen scale, a terrific and inexpensive addition to your kitchen. Weighing ingredients is more accurate and actually faster.

    Baking Tools

    I use a light silver colored, uncoated, heavyweight aluminized steel loaf pan. The one I use is made by Chicago Metallic and measures approximately 10″ x 5″. If your pan is a different size, you may need to adjust your baking time.

    Lastly, a food processor makes it easy to mix sticky bananas, oil and other ingredients quickly and smoothly.

    how to make banana bread
    mixing banana bread

    Instructions

    Pre-heat the oven and grease your baking pan.

    • Blend the dry ingredients (flour, baking powder and soda, salt) in one bowl
    • Add the wet ingredients (bananas, sugar, oil, eggs, vanilla) to a food processor workbowl
    • Pulse the banana group until smooth, then add the dry ingredients and pulse until combined.
    • If you want to add the optional chopped nuts, pour the batter back into the bowl and fold in by hand.
    • Pour into the prepared baking pan and bake according to the recipe card.

    To Serve

    After removing the baked banana bread form the oven, cool it on a wire rack. Have a slice while it's still warm. It's so good. It will keep a room temperature a few days, then refrigerate or freeze what is left.

    Related Recipes

    For another delicious gluten-free bread try this Irish soda bread.

    📖 Recipe

    Gluten Free Banana Bread

    Sally Cameron
    Just like the classic banan bread but gluten-free, so everyone can enjoy it.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 40 minutes mins
    Total Time 50 minutes mins
    Course Breakfast, Snack
    Cuisine American
    Servings 10
    Calories 224 kcal

    Equipment

    • blender or food processor
    • Light colored metal muffin pan
    • Avocado spray or baking spray

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 ¾ cups gluten-free flour blend I use King Arthur
    • 1 ¼ teaspoons baking soda
    • 1 teaspoon baking powder aluminum-free
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt
    • 3 large ripe bananas, peeled
    • ⅔ cup golden brown sugar
    • ½ cup unrefined organic coconut oil, melted plus extra to grease pan or use spray
    • 2 large eggs
    • 1 ½ teaspoons vanilla extract

    Optional Add

    • ½ cup chopped walnuts
    • ½ cup chocolate chips mini or regular

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Pre-heat oven to 350 degrees (conventional oven). Spray a metal baking loaf pan.
    • To a medium bowl add flour, baking soda, baking powder and salt and whisk to combine. Add the bananas, eggs, oil, and vanilla to a blender or food processor and puree just until smooth. If it gets too stiff, use the tamper of your blender or a long flexible spatula to help it along. It will puree.
    • Add the sugar to the blender. If your blender has trouble blending the brown sugar into the banana mixture, use a spatula or a tamper to help it along-or stir it in by hand after blending. The mixture will be thick, especially if your bananas are on the firm side.
    • Pour the batter into the prepared pan and bake for 50-60 minutes. When done, the bread will feel firm to the touch and a toothpick or cake tester inserted into the center will come out clean with just a few moist crumbs.
      Remove from the oven and cool on a wire rack for 10 minutes, then cool completely on a wire rack. Freeze what you don't eat within a 4 days. Extra bread freeze for up to 3 months individually wrapped or in a freezer-safe container. Remember to label and date.

    Notes

    If you need egg-free banana bread, use a flax seed egg or chia seed egg as an egg replacer. For 2 eggs, combine 2 tablespoon flax meal OR whole chia seeds with 6 tablespoons water and let sit for 5 to 10 minutes until gelatinous. Then add to the recipe with the banana. You can also use a commercial egg replacer. 
    Optional add-ins:
    • ½ cup chopped walnuts.
    • ½ cup regular or mini chocolate chips.
    • ½ - 1 teaspoon ground cinnamon.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 224kcalCarbohydrates: 33gProtein: 3gFat: 11gSaturated Fat: 8gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.4gMonounsaturated Fat: 1gTrans Fat: 0.003gCholesterol: 31mgSodium: 213mgPotassium: 150mgFiber: 3gSugar: 17gVitamin A: 67IUVitamin C: 3mgCalcium: 48mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Baked Feta Cheese (Easy Mediterranean Appetizer)

    06/11/2013 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

    Mediterranean appetizer tray with baked feta (mezze platter).

    Baked feta cheese is an easy Mediterranean appetizer made with a block of feta, olive oil, herbs, and a little red pepper, then baked until warm, soft, and creamy. Serve it with olives, roasted tomatoes, cucumbers, gluten-free crackers, or gluten-free pita. Make it the centerpiece of a simple mezze platter. It takes about 15 minutes in the oven and is perfect for easy entertaining.

    Baked feta cheese as part of a mezze platter of appetizers.

    When guests come for dinner, it's always nice to have something ready to nibble on. As dinner aromas drift from the kitchen and the wine starts to pour, this warm baked feta cheese appetizer gives everyone an easy, flavorful bite without adding stress for the cook. It's simple to prep ahead, quick to bake, and turns a few pantry ingredients into something that feels special.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Baked Feta Cheese Snapshot

    • It's delicious, versatile, easy to do.
    • Easily changes with seasonal ingredients.
    • Great for get-togethers and appetizer needs.

    For another cheese option, make these easy Caprese skewers with grape tomatoes, basil, and mini mozzarella balls.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Baked feta cheese is terrific as a stand alone appetizer and a nice change from the standard cheese and crackers. For a bigger crowd, make baked feta part of fun appetizer party spread called a mezze platter in Mediterranean countries. Delicious to eat and beautiful visually.

    Mediterranean appetizer tray called a mezze platter with baked feta cheese, prosciutto, olives, grapes, and crackers.
    • Feta cheese: Get a block of good tangy Greek feta made from a combination of goat and sheep's milk or all goat's milk. Cow's milk feta cheese works too.
    • Olive oil: To drizzle over the feta for baking. Use a nice fresh fruity one, or a Greek olive oil from koroneiki olives.
    • Fresh herbs: Use Greek oregano, mint, parsley and/or thyme leaves.
    • Red pepper flakes: To give your baked feta some spice and make it like a more Greek baked feta mezze dish called Bouyiourdi.

    What to Serve With Baked Feta (Serving Options)

    There are more things you could add to the baked feta depending on how many mouths to feed but this gives you lots of ideas for creating your own spread.

    • Olives: Black Greek olives (kalamata, get the pitted) or green castelvetrano olives, buy them at the store or marinate your own.
    • Grapes: Red and green provide nice color.
    • Meat: Roll some prosciutto, speck (smoked prosciutto), and coppa are my favorites.
    • Nuts: Almonds, raw or roasted. Marcona almonds are great too.
    • Hummus: Homemade hummus is easy to make, or get a store variety.
    • Meat: Prosciutto pr Speck are good options, roll lengthwise so they are easy to pick up and display on the platter. Small Greek meatballs called keftedes (kef-teeds) are a mainstay of Greek family gatherings.
    • Dolmas: Stuffed grape leaves, they comes in cans and jars.
    • Tzatziki: A famous Greek dip made with thick Greek yogurt, herbs, olive oil and lemons. Make it yourself with my homemade tzatziki sauce recipe.
    • Ciliegine: For another cheese option, serve small balls of mozzarella cheese called ciligene, either plain or marinated.
    • Vegetables: Either raw, grilled, or roasted.

    Another great option is hummus, like this roasted red bell pepper hummus recipe.

    How to Make Baked Feta Cheese

    Use an oven-safe baking dish or baking casserole large enough to fit the cheese or cheeses if you are baking multiple blocks. Choose a size with just enough space around the cheese. If you are adding items to bake such as small tomatoes or olives, be sure there is enough space. Choose a nice enough dish to serve directly from.

    A block of feta cheese in a baking dish with olive oil and herbs, ready to bake.
    Step 1: Add the block of feta to a small baking casserole, drizzle with olive oil and sprinkle with herbs and red pepper. Bake for about 20 minutes at 375°F until soft then serve while hot.
    Close up of baked feta cheese on a tray with grapes and crackers.

    Planning Ahead

    To create your Mediterranean platter in advance, get all of the components ready to arrange. Place them in an interesting variety of small bowls. If serving grapes, wash and trim them into small clusters. Cover the small bowls with plastic film and refrigerate if needed for the item. When you are ready to serve, arrange all of the components on your serving platter or a big tray.

    More Appetizer and Get-Together Recipe Ideas

    Whether you're having a party or watching the game with friends and family, try these spread ideas to keep everyone happy and well fed. For more ideas check out the appetizer recipe archive.

    • Closeup of mushroom pate in a white ramekin with a spoon.
      Classic French Mushroom Duxelle
    • A white bowl of roasted red pepper hummus to serve as an appetizer.
      Roasted Red Bell Pepper Hummus Recipe
    • A bowl of cream Greek Tzatziki with dill and olive oil drizzle with raw veggies and crackers.
      Easy Tzatziki Recipe (Greek Yogurt Sauce)
    • Golden Mediterranean hummus in a bowl sprinkled with olive oil, za'atar, and garbanzo beans.
      Homemade Hummus Without Tahini

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make baked feta, please comment, and let me know ti came out and what you did. I love hearing from you, and your comments help other readers. Thanks for supporting my site.

    📖 Recipe

    Mediterranean appetizer tray with baked feta (mezze platter).

    Baked Feta Cheese

    Sally Cameron
    This Mediterranean-inspired appetizer tray is easy to assemble and has something for everyone to nibble before dinner. The feta cheese takes just a few minutes and can be served with crackers or thinly sliced baguette. This tray makes a nice light dinner too, when paired with a salad. Add hummus or other favorite things. This recipe doubles easily.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 20 minutes mins
    Cook Time 15 minutes mins
    Total Time 35 minutes mins
    Course Appetizer, Snack
    Cuisine Mediterranean
    Servings 4 to 6
    Calories 196 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    Baked Feta

    • 6-8 ounces block of Greek feta cheese
    • 2 tablespoons of olive oil
    • 1-2 tablespoons of fresh herbs such as parsley, oregano, thyme, or mint
    • A sprinkle of red pepper flakes

    The Rest of the Mezze Platter (see more ideas at the end)

    • 6 ounces sliced Prosciutto or Speck smoked Prosciutto
    • 1 jar marinated Mediterranean olives
    • 1 small bowl of raw almonds
    • 1 bunch grapes washed and clipped into small clusters
    • A selection of crackers and pita bread or thinly sliced toasted baguette

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Pre-heat oven to 375°F degrees. Place feta in a baking dish just big enough to hold the cheese. Drizzle with olive oil, herbs, and red pepper. Bake for about 20 minutes or until the cheese it hot. It won't really melt, but will get soft.
    • While the cheese is baking, arrange all of your other ingredients on a platter or tray. When the cheese is done, place in a small dish, pour the olive oil from the dish (or a little extra) and herbs over the top and serve.

    Notes

    Mezze Platter Options

    • Olives: Black Greek olives (kalamata, get the pitted) or green olives, buy them at the store or marinate your own.
    • Grapes: Red and green provide nice color.
    • Meat: Roll some prosciutto, speck (smoked prosciutto), and coppa are my favorites.
    • Nuts: Almonds, raw or roasted.
    • Hummus: Homemade hummus is easy to make, or get a store variety.
    • Meat: Prosciutto pr Speck are good options, roll lengthwise so they are easy to pick up and display on the platter.
    • Dolmas: Stuffed grape leaves, they comes in cans and jars.
    • Tzatziki: A famous Greek dip made with yogurt, herbs, olive oil and lemons. Make it yourself with my homemade tzatziki sauce recipe.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 196kcalCarbohydrates: 8gProtein: 6gFat: 16gSaturated Fat: 7gCholesterol: 38mgSodium: 476mgPotassium: 92mgFiber: 1gSugar: 7gVitamin A: 284IUVitamin C: 2mgCalcium: 214mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Gluten Free Waffles (Crisp & Golden)

    05/08/2023 by Sally Cameron 4 Comments

    Close up of crispy golden waffles with blueberries, raspberries, strawberries.

    These golden light gluten-free waffles are worth getting out of bed for. Skip the frozen waffles and make homemade for those mornings when only waffles will do. Crisp outside, fluffy inside, they are sure to be a hit. Freeze leftovers and warm them up for busy mornings. Dairy-free waffles option and sugar-free option too. Have them on the table in 30 minutes.

    A stack of golden crispy gluten-free waffles with berries, maple and powdered sugar.

    While testing this gluten free waffle recipe, I shared batches of waffles with the neighborhood. Everyone commented on the crisp exterior and light, fluffy center-and were surprised they're gluten-free. You don't need to be gluten-free to enjoy them; they're simply great waffles.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love Gluten-Free Waffles

    Ingredients for gluten free waffles recipe in small prep bowls on counter.
    • Crispy & fluffy - Golden edges, tender centers, gluten free.
    • Weekday-easy - One bowl; no whipped whites, no resting.
    • Freezer-friendly - Cool, freeze flat, then re-crisp in the toaster or oven.
    • Flexible - Dairy-free and sugar-free options that still brown and crisp.
    • Top-it-your-way - Berries, yogurt, nut butter, syrup, see ideas below.

    For another hearty breakfast, try these naturally gluten-free buckwheat pancakes.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    • Flour: I tested with King Arthur Measure for Measure gluten free flour with xanthan gum. Other GF flours may work fine, I have just not tested them. If your blend doesn't include xanthan, add about ¼ teaspoon per cup of flour.
    • Milk: Gluten-free waffles work with both dairy milk (low-fat or whole). For other milks, try almond milk. Coconut milk is another option (not straight canned but diluted).
    • Vanilla: Vanilla extract adds that perfect subtle sweetness and depth of flavor.
    • Eggs: Large eggs, un-cracked and clean.
    • Baking powder: Make sure it's fresh (check date); aluminum-free preferred (Rumford or Clabber Girl).
    • Butter or oil: Unsalted butter or ghee. For dairy-free, use a neutral oil or melted dairy-free butter. Substitutions below.
    • Sweetener: Granulated sugar or a monk fruit-allulose blend both work.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements and salt.

    Chef's Tip - Crisp outside, fluffy inside: Preheat the iron fully; use a neutral oil or melted ghee in the batter (both brown better without the water in butter), cook to deep golden, then keep warm for serving or cool on a wire rack to serve later and reheat-don't stack. Sugar-free batters brown lighter, so give them another minute or add 1-2 teaspoon oil.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • For dairy-free fat: Use melted coconut oil, avocado oil, or this healthy neutral oil. Many people that are dairy-sensitive find they can use ghee or clarified butter as it's pure butterfat. Another option is plant-based butter.
    • For dairy-free milk: I've tested my gluten-free waffles recipe with almond milk and it works great. If you're using homemade almond milk, strain it for this recipe so it's fluid not creamy.
    • For gluten-free vegan waffles - I have not tested this recipe for a vegan waffle recipe, but using flax eggs or an egg replacer should work, along with almond milk and either coconut oil or melted unsalted plant-butter.

    For another terrific breakfast treat, try these Dutch baby oven pancakes.

    How to Make Gluten-Free Waffles

    Set up: Pre-heat your waffle maker or waffle iron, set a nonstick cooking spray near it, pre-heated 200°F oven to keep finished warm waffles or serving (or a warming drawer). Place a baking sheet and a wire rack on top of it to hold the finished gluten-free waffles.

    Sifting dry ingredients for waffles to aerate the flour and remove lumps.
    Step 1. Measure dry ingredients, then sift into a large bowl (optional-sifting aerates for lighter, crisper waffles). If you skip it, whisk well.
    Wet ingredients for waffle batter in a glass bowl.
    Step 2: In another bowl or large measuring cup, add eggs, melted butter, vanilla.
    Waffle batter with all ingredients in a bowl before mixing.
    Step 3: Add half of the liquid ingredients into the dry and whisk smooth
    Smoothly mixed waffle batter ready for the waffle maker.
    Step 4: No need to rest the batter, it is ready to use.
    Gluten-free waffle batter spread into the waffle maker.
    Step 5: Lightly spray or oil with a pastry brush, the top and bottom plates of the waffle maker, add batter. Don't overfill. Use a mini spatula to get the batter to the corners.
    Golden light finished waffles ready for the table.
    Step 6: Waffles are done when golden brown and the steam stops.

    Chef's Tip - Batter consistency: Aim for a smooth, pourable batter about like heavy cream; a few small lumps are fine. Too thick? Add 1-2 tablespoon milk. Too thin? Sprinkle in a little more flour and whisk smooth.

    Plates of golden Belgian waffles with fresh berries and maple syrup.

    Tips for Success

    • Preheat the waffle maker fully; the first waffle is your tester.
    • Don't overfill-the batter expands.
    • For clean edges, use a small offset or silicone spatula to nudge batter into the corners quickly; keep the lid open as briefly as possible.
    • Lightly grease only if needed; brush on a thin film of oil.
    • Every iron is different-on mine, medium-high (5-6) is the sweet spot; adjust heat and time for yours.
    • Peek once near expected doneness-every peek loses heat.
    • Cook by cues: when steam mostly subsides and the waffle is a rich golden color, it's done-for crispy gluten free waffles, go to a deeper golden and cool on a wire rack (don't stack).
    • For batches/crowds, place finished waffles on a wire rack set over a rimmed sheet pan in a 175-200°F oven; don't stack (they'll stay warm and crisp).
    • Cleanup: after unplugging, brush crumbs out with a soft pastry brush while grids are warm; wipe when cool.

    Ways to Enjoy Gluten-Free Waffles

    Sweet toppers

    • Fresh berries (or thawed frozen), homemade applesauce, or maple syrup.
    • Strawberry coulis or blueberry compote.
    • Raspberry sauce.
    • Greek yogurt + honey or maple syrup.
    • Nut butter (almond, peanut, or cashew) with banana slices.
    • Maple butter or a light cinnamon "sugar" dusting.
    • A few chocolate chips or shaved dark chocolate.
    • Frozen yogurt anyone? I won't tell.

    Savory spins (great for brunch!)

    • Avocado toast, but on a waffle.
    • Benedict-style: thin ham or prosciutto, poached eggs, hollandaise.
    • Waffles rancheros: black beans, salsa, fried egg, cilantro.
    • Softly scrambled eggs with seasonal fruit on the side; bacon or sausage never hurts.
    • Smoked salmon, crème fraîche (or DF yogurt), dill, and lemon.

    Serving notes

    • For savory toppings, you can reduce the sweetener in the batter slightly.
    • Keep waffles on a rack (175-200°F oven) so they stay crisp while you finish toppings.

    Leftovers & Storage

    Leftover waffles freeze and re-heat well. Wrap well for overnight in the refrigerator or freeze for longer. To freeze, place waffles in a single layer on a sheet pan and freeze about 15 minutes. Remove the waffles and freeze in a ziplock bag.

    To re-heat gluten-free waffles, use a toaster oven, toaster, a microwave oven, or regular oven and a baking sheet.

    Golden gluten-free waffles with melted butter and strawberry sauce poured over the top.

    Recipe FAQs

    Should you let waffle batter rest?

    Some recipes advise resting batter, because it gives the gluten in wheat flours time to relax. Not necessary with gluten-free flours, so you're making waffles faster with terrific results. Even if you don't eat gluten-free, you'll love this recipe. Try it! You will never know they are gluten-free waffles.

    How do I make crispy gluten free waffles?

    Preheat the iron fully, use neutral oil or melted ghee in the batter, and keep the batter smooth and pourable. Cook to deep golden (let the steam mostly stop), then move the waffle straight to a wire rack-don't stack. Sugar-free batters brown lighter, so add 1-2 teaspoon oil or give them another minute; if edges soften, pop in the toaster to re-crisp.

    Do I need to separate and whip egg whites?


    No-this recipe is crisp and fluffy without that step. If you want extra lift, separate the eggs, whisk the yolks into the batter, and beat the whites to soft peaks; gently fold them in at the end. Expect a lighter interior and slightly less surface crisp. Some cooks add an extra white for even more lift, but I haven't tested that here-if you try it, keep the batter pourable (not thin).

    Do they freeze and reheat well?

    Yes. Cool on a rack, freeze flat, then bag. Reheat from frozen in a toaster or on a oven rack at 350°F until the edges are crisp and hot.

    More Breakfast Recipes

    For a recipe on how to make homemade almond milk. For another breakfast splurge try these lemon ricotta pancakes. For more gluten free recipes, check out the gluten-free category page.

    • A glass of cream chia coconut pudding topped with blueberries and raspberries with a silver spoon.
      Chia Pudding with Coconut Milk
    • Avocado tomato toast with baby greens on top and basil leaves.
      Tomato Avocado Toast
    • Stacked buckwheat pancakes on a white plate with syrup and blueberries.
      The Best Buckwheat Pancakes Recipe
    • A single yogurt breakfast parfait with layers of fruit, granola, and yogurt.
      How to Make Greek Yogurt Parfaits

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make these gluten free waffles, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Close up of crispy golden waffles with blueberries, raspberries, strawberries.

    Gluten-free Waffles

    Sally Cameron
    Golden waffles are a breakfast treat for weekends and holidays. These Belgian-style waffles will surprise anyone who has not tried eating gluten-free. Serve with maple syrup and fresh berries. but check the post for more crazy fun ideas.
    5 from 2 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 15 minutes mins
    Total Time 25 minutes mins
    Course Breakfast, Brunch
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4 2 waffles each
    Calories 368 kcal

    Equipment

    • waffle maker
    • small offset spatula
    • soft pastry brush

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 ¾ cups gluten-free flour (King Arthur M4M GF) 8 ounces
    • 2 teaspoons baking powder aluminum-free
    • 1 ¾ cups dairy milk, low-fat or whole or almond milk
    • 2 large eggs
    • 1 tablespoon monk fruit blend or sugar
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • ½ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ cup melted unsalted butter or ghee or melted coconut oil
    • non-stick avocado spray oil or other spray

    Optional toppings (see post for more serving ideas)

    • maple syrup regular or sugar-free
    • fresh berries
    • powdered monk fruit or powdered sugar
    • chocolate chips

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Set-up

    • Pre-heat an oven to 200°F. Ready a rimmed baking sheet with a wire rack and place in the oven to keep finished waffles warm and crisp. Get your waffle maker ready and heating on a medium high setting.

    Make waffle batter

    • In a large bowl, sift together the dry ingredients: flour, baking powder, sugar and salt. In another bowl or large measuring cup, whisk eggs until blended, then add milk, sweetener, vanilla. and butter or oil. Whisk together until well blended.
    • Pour half of wet ingredients into dry ingredients and stir or whisk together, then add the rest and whisk smooth. Doing it in stages makes for a smoother, lump-free batter.

    Make waffles

    • Give both top and bottom plates a quick spray of non-stick (avocado oil is good) or use a soft pastry brush and oil. When iron is hot, pour ⅓-1/2 cup of batter into each square or full round. For square corners, quickly smooth batter into the corners with a small off-set spatula. Close the lid. Do not overfill as waffles expand as they cook.
      Cook until waffles are golden, about 5 minutes, depending on your waffle iron.
    • Place in the oven to stay warm and crisp, and continue cooking more waffles. Top with your desired additions and enjoy!

    Notes

    Chef's Tip: When measuring dry ingredients for baking, it's fast, easy and accurate to weight the flour with a digital kitchen scale. It's especially important in gluten-free baking as flours vary. 
    For dairy-free: Use melted coconut oil, avocado oil, or a neutral oil, and almond milk or coconut milk. 
    For vegan waffles: I have not tested this recipe for vegan waffles, but using flax eggs or an egg replacer should work, along with almond milk and either coconut oil or melted unsalted plant-butter.
     

    Nutrition

    Calories: 368kcalCarbohydrates: 47gProtein: 12gFat: 18gSaturated Fat: 9gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 5gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 132mgSodium: 298mgPotassium: 184mgFiber: 5gSugar: 7gVitamin A: 595IUVitamin C: 0.2mgCalcium: 294mgIron: 3mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    How to Make Zucchini Noodles

    02/04/2014 by Sally Cameron 7 Comments

    Zucchini noodles being made with a spiralizer tool.

    Zucchini noodles? Yes! Long strands of zucchini that look like pasta noodles and taste terrific. Zucchini noodles are a great way to add vegetables to your diet. You will need an inexpensive tool called a spiral vegetable slicer (or spiralizer) to make them, then read this post on how to make zucchini noodles to guide you through. It's easy.

    zucchini noodles | AFoodCentricLife.com

    How to Make Zucchini Noodles

    If you are trying to get more vegetables into your diet (and who isn't), here is a fun was to meet that goal. Zucchini noodles! This cool little tool is called a spiralizer or a spiral vegetable slicer. They are inexpensive and available in many places, and of course on Amazon.

    I first encountered one of these gadgets years ago working with a catering company. We used them for creating long, thin strands of bright orange carrots and ruby red beets for garnishes. I bought one and am experimenting with it to expand our vegetable repertoire at home.

    zucchini noodles

    Making Zucchinin Noodles

    Spiral vegetable slicers come with either 3-5 blades for different cuts.  For zucchini, I use the ⅛″ or smallest blade. The other blades store inside the base. Some new models even come with a noodles container for refrigerator storage.

    Choose large zucchini, about 8 ounces in size. Wash zucchini and trim ends flat. Center zucchini onto the spiked handle, then center the other end into the circle of the slicing blade. Turn the handle and create long strands of zucchini noodles. There will be a narrow center piece left after you create your zucchini noodles. You can chop it up and cook it with your noodles, discard it, snack on it or do as I do: add it to my dogs food. He loves veggies.

    One large zucchini will make enough for two people. Slice extra and keep them in the fridge for a few days when packaged tightly so they do not dry out. Then you can enjoy a quick and healthy dinner after a long day at work.

    How to Cook Zucchini Noodles

    To cook zucchini noodles, add a tablespoon of olive oil to a hot sauté or fry pan. Add thinly sliced shallot and cook a minute until soft. Add a little garlic and cook 1 minute. Add zucchini noodles and cook until they are softened. Zucchini noodles cook quickly. Season with salt and pepper and serve.  If you enjoy cheese, a sprinkle of Parmesan is nice, but totally optional.

    You can use zucchini noodles as a vegan main dish, side dish or as the base for other dishes as you would pasta. In a few days I will post a recipe to use with chicken or fish.

    zucchini noodles

    To Clean Your Spiral Slicer Rinse it off right away and it cleans up easy. A small toothbrush works well for crevices and blades, if needed. Don't let it sit around and allow the vegetables to dry and stick. It will be harder to wash.

    📖 Recipe

    zucchini noodles | AFoodCentricLife.com

    How to Make Zucchini Noodles

    Sally Cameron
    To make Zucchini noodles you will need a spiral vegetable slicer. It is a fun way to add vegetables to your diet. Check links in the post for purchasing options.Cook and eat the noodles by themselves or mix half and half with pasta noodles for a nice combination.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 5 minutes mins
    Total Time 20 minutes mins
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4 servings
    Calories 64 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • 2 large zucchini 8 ounces each
    • 1 tablespoon olive oil
    • 1 large shallot sliced into thin rings
    • 1-2 garlic cloves finely chopped
    • Salt and pepper

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Wash zucchini and trim ends flat. Place zucchini on the spiral slicer and turn the handle. You may need to hold that base, depending on how well the cups stick to the counter.
    • Heat olive oil in a medium sauté or fry pan. Add the shallot rings and cook until they are softened, about 1-2 minutes. Add the garlic and cook 1 minute. Add the zucchini and cook for a few minutes until it is softened and hot.
    • Season with a sprinkle of salt and pepper and serve as a side dish or as you would pasta.

    Notes

    Zucchini noodles cook quickly. Season with salt and pepper and serve.  If you enjoy cheese, a sprinkle of Parmesan is nice, but totally optional.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 64kcalCarbohydrates: 6gProtein: 2gFat: 4gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 3gSodium: 14mgPotassium: 445mgFiber: 2gSugar: 5gVitamin A: 323IUVitamin C: 30mgCalcium: 30mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Zucchini Noodles Recipe with Roasted Tomatoes

    02/16/2014 by Sally Cameron 6 Comments

    Zucchini noodles with roasted tomatoes in a bowl.

    This zucchini noodles recipe with roasted tomatoes is fresh, healthy, and simple to make. Noodles made from zucchini are a fun way to add more vegetables to dinner, but if going all-in feels like too much, combine them with traditional pasta for the best of both worlds. The pasta adds substance and a little protein, while the zucchini keeps it light. Roasted cherry tomatoes bring rich flavor, making this an easy meatless dinner everyone will enjoy.

    A bowl of zucchini noodles and pasta noodles with roasted red tomatoes on a fork.

    Zucchini noodles are a simple way to add more vegetables to your plate. For this recipe, I like to use half spaghetti and half zucchini noodles for balance-it lightens the dish while still keeping it satisfying. Use your favorite gluten-free spaghetti, made from brown rice or another grain, or whole grain wheat pasta if you prefer.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love This Zucchini Noodles Recipe

    • Fresh and healthy - Light zucchini noodles paired with roasted tomatoes make a flavorful, veggie-packed dinner.
    • Flexible - Use all zucchini noodles for a low-carb option, or combine them with spaghetti for balance.
    • Gluten-free friendly - Works with gluten-free pasta or whole grain wheat pasta.
    • Easy make-ahead flavor - Roasted tomatoes can be prepared ahead of time for quick weeknight meals.
    • Add protein - Browned and cooked chicken sausage is a great addition for more easy protein.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    • Zucchini - Use fresh zucchini to spiralize into zucchini noodles (zoodles).
    • Pasta - If adding pasta, choose spaghetti-either whole wheat or gluten-free brown rice pasta.
    • Shallot - Adds a sweet, earthy depth to the dish.
    • Garlic - Fresh cloves give the best flavor.
    • Tomatoes - Make the roasted cherry tomatoes ahead of time for convenience, or use fresh tomatoes if you prefer.
    • Parmesan cheese - Optional, but a little adds salty, nutty umami.
    • Olive oil - Extra virgin olive oil for sautéing and flavor.
    • Fresh herbs - Basil, oregano, and parsley brighten the flavor and add color.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt and pepper.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Tomato options - Instead of roasted tomatoes, you can use chopped sun-dried tomatoes, canned diced tomatoes, fresh diced tomatoes or fresh cherry tomatoes. If using fresh, add them to the pan with the shallot and garlic and cook until softened.
    • Protein boost - Add chopped, browned pre-cooked sausage for extra protein. Plan about 1 link per person, or 2 for hearty appetites.

    How to Make Zucchini Noodles with Roasted Tomatoes

    To start, decide on your tomatoes. Roast a batch or use one of the options above. Next, get water boiling for pasta and get out your spiralizer. Cook the pasta and keep it warm.

    Zesting garlic fine into a bowl of cherry tomatoes for roasting.
    1. Start the roast tomatoes if you've not made them. Halve tomatoes and add garlic, oil, and herbs. Roast the tomatoes on parchment on a baking sheet until browned and a little shriveled and jammy.
    Zucchini noodles being made with a spiralizer tool.
    2. Make your zucchini noodles and set aide near the stove.
    Cherry tomatoes after roasting on baking tray.
    A pan of zucchini noodles and pasta with roasted red tomatoes.
    3. Cook the zucchini noodles briefly in olive oil, shallots, and garlic, then add the cooked pasta.
    A pan of zucchini noddles and past noodles with roasted tomatoes.
    4. Add the roasted tomatoes and it's ready to serve.

    Serving Suggestions

    Serve zucchini noodles with roasted tomatoes as a light main dish or as a side. Pair it with a crisp green salad and simple vinaigrette, or round it out with gluten-free garlic toast. For more protein, top with grilled chicken, shrimp, or sausage.

    Storage and Freezing

    You can spiralize zucchini noodles up to 2-3 days ahead and store them in the refrigerator in an airtight container lined with a paper towel to absorb excess moisture. For best quality, enjoy them as close to prep time as possible.

    Fresh zucchini noodles don't freeze well because they release a lot of water when thawed and turn mushy. For best results, make and cook them fresh.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I use only zucchini noodles?

    Absolutely. Skip the pasta for a lighter, low-carb, gluten-free option.

    How do you keep zucchini noodles from getting soggy?

    Cook them quickly over medium-high heat, just until warmed through. Overcooking releases too much water from the zucchini.

    What tomato options work best?

    This recipe is written with roasted tomatoes, but you can use sun-dried, canned diced, or fresh cherry tomatoes. If using fresh, sauté with the shallot and garlic until softened.

    Do zucchini noodles taste like pasta?

    They don't taste like wheat pasta but they're mild and take on the flavor of sauces. Combining zucchini noodles with spaghetti gives you the best of both worlds.

    What sauces go well with zucchini noodles?

    This recipe uses roasted tomatoes, but zucchini noodles also pair well with spinach pesto, marinara, or a light garlic and olive oil sauce.

    More Zucchini Recipe

    If you're looking for more ways to enjoy zucchini, here are a few reader favorites to try next.

    • A dutch oven full of chicken minestrone soup with a bowl on the side.
      Hearty Chicken Minestrone Soup
    • tomato and zucchini casserole
      Zucchini Tomato Casserole
    • Grilled zucchini in a grill basket right off the barbecue.
      Simple Grilled Zucchini
    • Zucchini casserole topped with browned curst of breadcrumbs and parmesan, with silver spoon.
      Zucchini Casserole with Parmesan Crust

    Did You Make This?

    If you make this zucchini noodles recipe, please let me know how you like it. I appreciate hearing from you and comments help other readers too.

    📖 Recipe

    Zucchini Noodles with Roasted Tomatoes | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Zucchini Noodles Recipe with Roasted Tomatoes

    Sally Cameron
    Zucchini noodles mixed with spaghetti makes a wonderful healthy meal. Roasted tomatoes add another level of flavor and nutrition. Enjoy as a meatless main dish or top with chicken breast, shrimp, or fish. Add fresh chopped herbs and maybe a drizzle of good olive oil to finish. A sprinkle of Parmesan is a nice too. For the roasted tomatoes see recipe link here or below. This recipe doubles easily.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 20 minutes mins
    Cook Time 20 minutes mins
    Total Time 40 minutes mins
    Course Dinner, Entree, Main Course
    Cuisine American, Italian
    Servings 4
    Calories 243 kcal

    Equipment

    • Large pot for the pasta
    • Saute pan or fry pan
    • Spiralizer for zucchini noodles

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 recipe roasted tomatoes LINK BELOW
    • 6-8 ounces spaghetti brown rice or whole wheat
    • 1 pound zucchini
    • 1 tablespoon olive oil
    • 1 large shallot sliced into thin rings
    • 3 large garlic cloves chopped fine
    • ¼ cup grated Parmesan cheese or more
    • ¼ cup fresh chopped parsley, oregano or basil leaves a combination is nice

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Start with the Tomatoes

    • Pre-heat oven to 375° and roast tomatoes following recipe. When done roasting, keep tomatoes warm.

    Start Noodles and Pasta

    • Bring a pot of water to boil for the spaghetti and spiral slice your zucchini noodles.

    Finish Dinner

    • Heat olive oil in a medium sauté pan over medium low heat and add shallot. Cook, stirring, until shallot rings are softened, 1-2 minutes. Add garlic and cook 1 minute.
    • Add zucchini noodles to the pan and cook 2-3 minutes or until softened. Add the pasta, as many tomatoes as you'd like, herbs and toss together. Place in shallow bowls to serve. If desired, drizzle with a little more olive oil and a sprinkle of Parmesan cheese.

    Notes

    Here is the link for the herb roasted tomatoes 
    The tomatoes are not included in the nutrition calculation as it's hard to know how many you will use. See that recipe for separate nutrition information.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 243kcalCarbohydrates: 38gProtein: 9gFat: 6gSaturated Fat: 2gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 3gCholesterol: 5mgSodium: 124mgPotassium: 453mgFiber: 3gSugar: 5gVitamin A: 597IUVitamin C: 26mgCalcium: 94mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Sauteed Cabbage Recipe

    03/10/2014 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

    braised cabbage in a bowl

    This sautéed cabbage recipe turns humble cabbage into a rich, savory side dish in about 20 minutes. Start by cooking cabbage with leeks, garlic, and herbs until it's silky and tender. You can keep it simple or add bacon for smoky flavor. It pairs beautifully with roast chicken, salmon, sausages, or ham, and for a great weekend breakfast you can even top it with poached eggs. Cabbage is for more than coleslaw!

    An oval bowl with braised cabbage, leeks, carrots, and bacon with a wooden serving spoon.

    While corned beef and cabbage is an American St. Patrick's Day staple, the traditional family meal in Ireland was often cabbage and bacon. This easy Irish-style sautéed cabbage recipe skips boiling and gently cooks the cabbage with a little broth, carrots, leeks, and thyme for extra flavor. Make it for St. Patrick's Day, then don't forget about it the rest of the year-it's an easy, delicious side dish.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Sauteed Cabbage Recipe Highlights

    • Big flavor from simple ingredients - Cabbage, leek, garlic, and bacon (optional) transform into a simple savory side dish with little effort.
    • Versatile side dish - Pairs with sausages, pork chops, roast chicken, corned beef, or even pan-seared fish such as salmon.
    • Make-ahead friendly - Sauteed cabbage reheats beautifully, so you can make it earlier in the day or enjoy leftovers the next night.
    • Budget-conscious - A head of cabbage plus a few strips of bacon feeds a crowd without breaking the bank.

    For another recipe to serve on St. Patrick's Day, try this Cauliflower Colcannon.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    • Cabbage: Choose a firm, heavy head with crisp leaves for the best texture and sweetness.
    • Bacon: Uncured pork bacon for smoky, savory flavor. Turkey bacon also works if you prefer a lighter option, or you can omit it.
    • Leek: The white and light green parts of a leek, adding a mild, sweet onion flavor.
    • Garlic: Fresh garlic cloves. Optional, but they bring extra depth and savoriness.
    • Carrots: Add color and a subtle natural sweetness that balances the cabbage and bacon.
    • Oil: Extra-virgin olive oil or avocado oil. Used to sauté the vegetables.
    • Broth: Low-sodium chicken broth or vegetable broth to give the cabbage more flavor than water alone.
    • Herbs: Fresh thyme, parsley, and a bay leaf for earthy, aromatic notes that round out the braised cabbage.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt, and black pepper.

    Salmon is another terrific dish to serve on St. Patrick's day (and any day). Try my simple steamed salmon recipe. It's foolproof.

    Substitutions and Variations

    Here are lots of fun and tasty variations for sauteed cabbage:

    • No leeks - Use white, yellow, or red onion.
    • Savoy cabbage - Use in place of green cabbage. It's slightly milder and more tender.
    • Napa cabbage - Another good option with a softer texture and slightly sweeter flavor.
    • Pancetta - Swap pancetta for the bacon for a similar smoky, savory result.
    • Ham or corned beef - Substitute chopped ham or corned beef instead of bacon for a heartier twist.
    • Scallions - Add chopped scallions at the end for fresh flavor and green color.
    • Caraway seeds - Add a pinch for a traditional flavor that enhances cabbage's natural sweetness.
    • German-style - Add 1-2 teaspoons of apple cider vinegar, white vinegar, or white wine vinegar near the end of cooking for a subtle tang.

    If you cringe at mayonnaise-heavy coleslaw, try my easy coleslaw recipe with a light and creamy dressing.

    How to Make Sauteed Cabbage

    Instead of cooking cabbage wedges, thinly slice the head of cabbage so it cooks quickly and add broth as a braising liquid to help it soften and add flavor. You'll need a large pan to hold all of the vegetables, like a 12" fry pan, sauté pan, or braiser.

    Thinly slicing cabbage on a white cutting board with a chef's knife.
    1. Clean and slice leek, grate carrot, thinly slice the raw cabbage, chop herbs.
    Frying chopped bacon in a shallow pan.
    1. Chop bacon, cook to crisp, drain on paper towels reserving 1 tablespoon of bacon drippings in pan.
    Raw grated carrot and leek in a saute pan starting to cook.
    1. Add olive oil, leeks and carrots to pan, cooking until softened, 2 minutes. Add garlic and cook 1 minute.
    A pile of thinly sliced green cabbage in a shallow pan with carrots.
    1. Add sliced cabbage, thyme, bay leaf, and broth, turning them over to mix together.
    Cooked green cabbage, orange carrots, and leek in a saute pan.
    1. Cover with lid, cook vegetables until softened, about minutes. Add salt and pepper.
    1. Add bacon when done, add parsley if using.

    Chef's tip: Eat more cabbage! Cabbage is an inexpensive and always available member of the cruciferous vegetable group. It's rich in antioxidants, phytonutrients, vitamins, minerals, and fiber. Besides in this braised cabbage recipe, it's good in salads, added to vegetable and chicken soup, shredded for tacos, used in green juices, and classic coleslaw. However you add it, get healthy cabbage into your diet. Plus, it's one of the low-carb vegetables.

    Serving Suggestions

    Sautéed cabbage is a perfect side dish alongside baked chicken breasts, stovetop seared salmon, and pork tenderloin or pork chops.

    For another side dish, potatoes are a must! Try this fluffy riced mashed potatoes recipe for the best mashed potatoes. Roasted red potatoes are another perfect option.

    How to Store Leftovers

    You can make sauteed cabbage ahead of time as it reheats well. Store it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days and reheat in a skillet over low heat or covered in a warm oven covered with aluminum foil.

    A bowl of cooked cabbage with carrots, leeks, bacon, and thyme and a wood spoon.

    Sauteed Cabbage FAQs

    What's the best type of cabbage to use for braised cabbage?

    Green cabbage is the most common, but Savoy cabbage works well for a more tender texture. Red cabbage can be used, though it may bleed color into the dish.

    Can I make this without bacon?

    Yes! Try using smoked sausage, pancetta, or ham for a meaty alternative. For a vegetarian version, add a little smoked paprika or a splash of soy sauce for depth of flavor. For vegans omit the meat of any type.

    Can I use a different cooking fat instead of bacon grease?

    Absolutely! Butter, ghee, or olive oil work well, though bacon fat adds extra flavor.

    How do I keep the cabbage from getting soggy?

    Avoid overcooking-braise until just tender. Cooking uncovered for the last few minutes helps reduce excess moisture.

    More Recipes With Cabbage and Greens

    Looking for more recipes with cabbage? Try a refreshing green juice with cabbage (it's sweet!), or these tasty cabbage salads.

    • cauliflower colcannon
      Cauliflower Colcannon with Kale
    • A glass of bright green cabbage juice on a brown cutting board with vegetable bowl behind.
      Cabbage Juice
    • White shallow bowl stilled with green cabbage coleslaw, carrots, and parsley with a light dressing.
      Easy Coleslaw Recipe and Dressing
    • chinese chicken salad
      Healthy Chicken Salad Recipe with Ginger Salad Dressing

    ⭐️Did You Make This?

    If you make this sauteed cabbage with bacon, please comment and let me know. I enjoy hearing from you and comments really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Braised Cabbage with Leeks and Bacon | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Braised Cabbage with Bacon

    Sally Cameron
    This is so good you will want to serve it more often than St. Patrick's Day. It's nice along side roast chicken or salmon any time of the year. Try it topped with a poached egg for weekend breakfasts. To make this vegetarian you can skip the bacon, and to make it vegan, use vegetable broth.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 7 minutes mins
    Cook Time 10 minutes mins
    Course Side Dish
    Cuisine Irish
    Servings 4
    Calories 131 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 large leek pale green and white part only
    • 1 small head green cabbage
    • 4 strips bacon uncured
    • 1 tablespoon olive oil or use all bacon fat
    • 3 garlic cloves finely chopped
    • ¾ cup grated carrot
    • ⅔ cup chicken broth or vegetable
    • 2 teaspoons fresh chopped thyme
    • 1 bay leaf
    • 2 teaspoons fresh chopped parsley optional

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Prep work

    • Cut root end and dark green top off of leek and discard. Slice leek in half lengthwise. Run leek halves under cold water to remove any sand and dirt. Dry. Lay them flat on a cutting board and chop thinly crosswise. 
      Cut cabbage in half through the root, lay halves flat on a cutting board and slice crosswise into thin ribbons. You will need 4 cups of packed cabbage.
      Slice bacon crosswise into thin strips.

    Cook bacon

    • In a large sauté or fry pan over medium heat, cook bacon until crisp. Remove bacon pieces and drain on paper towels reserving 1 tablespoon of bacon drippings in pan. Wipe the rest from the pan with paper towels.

    Cook cabbage

    • Add olive oil to pan. Heat oil over medium heat. Add leek and carrot and cook about 2 minutes, stirring, until softened. Add garlic and cook 1 minute longer.
      Add cabbage to the pan along with broth, thyme and bay leaf. Stir and turn to coat vegetables well with broth and juices. Sprinkle with a little salt and pepper. Add cooked bacon.
      Cover pan with a lid and cook until cabbage is soft and wilted, about 7 minutes. Taste to determine if cabbage is done enough for you. If you would prefer it softer, cover and cook for another 1-2 minutes.
      Remove bay leaf before serving, sprinkle with parsley, and adjust seasoning with any additional salt and pepper.

    Notes

    • Try Savoy cabbage in place of the green cabbage. It's slightly milder and more tender than green cabbage.
    • Napa cabbage is another good variation with a softer texture and it's a bit sweeter.
    • Swap pancetta for the bacon. It's still rich but slightly saltier than bacon.
    • Substitute bits of finely chopped ham or corned beef instead of the bacon.
    •  
    •  
    •  

    Nutrition

    Calories: 131kcalCarbohydrates: 20gProtein: 4gFat: 5gSaturated Fat: 1gCholesterol: 1mgSodium: 76mgPotassium: 546mgFiber: 7gSugar: 3gCalcium: 120mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Spiced Mango Coconut Smoothie

    04/23/2014 by Sally Cameron 1 Comment

    coconut mango smoothie

    This creamy mango coconut smoothie blends ripe mango with coconut milk and a hint of warm spice for a sunny, island-inspired start to your day. It's refreshing, energizing, and comes together in seconds. Whether you need a quick breakfast or a midday lift, this smoothie hits the sweet spot between easy and nourishing.

    Creamy coconut mango smoothie in 3 glasses on a blue plate.

    Smoothies are part of my morning routine because they're quick, satisfying, and make me feel great. I rotate through seasonal flavors and ingredients, always creating new blends that match the moment. This mango coconut smoothie is one I come back to often, especially in summer-it's creamy, nourishing, and full of bright tropical flavor.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love This Recipe

    • Tropical flavor - Mango and coconut make this taste like a beach vacation in a glass.
    • Quick and easy - Blend and go in under 5 minutes.
    • Naturally dairy-free - Made with coconut milk, no yogurt or dairy needed.
    • Spiced twist - A pinch of cinnamon or turmeric adds warmth and a little something extra.
    • Perfect anytime - Great for breakfast, post-workout, or a healthy snack.

    Love mango? Here's another mango smoothie with pineapple.

    Mango Coconut Smoothie Ingredients

    • Coconut milk - Choose unsweetened, canned coconut milk, in a BPA-free can preferably. Adds rich, tropical creaminess without dairy.
    • Almond milk - I make homemade for the most creamy smoothie! It's so easy, just soak and puree, and I do not strain mine. If you're buying, read the labels for additives and buy pure almond milk. See milk options below.
    • Mango - Use fresh or frozen mango for natural sweetness.
    • Banana - The small greenish ones for lower sugar, adds body, creaminess, and sweetness.
    • Protein powder - I am currently using whey protein as it's best for building muscle, but use your favorite.
    • Spices - Tropical spices of cinnamon, turmeric, nutmeg, and allspice all work, Use use or a blend.
    • Vanilla - The ultimate tropical flavoring, use extract or paste.
    • Sweetener - I use zero-sugar honey, options below.

    Chef's tip: Smoothie Boosters - Want to take your smoothie to the next level? There are lots of great optional add-ins to boost nutrition and flavor. I list my favorites in my Healthy Smoothie Guide-check it out if you're ready to level up your blends.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Sweeteners - Adjust to taste. Try pitted Medjool dates, a monk fruit/allulose blend, stevia drops, maple syrup, or honey.
    • Add greens - Toss in a small handful of spinach or kale for a nutrient boost-you won't taste it, but it will change the color.
    • Protein options - Collagen peptides, plain Greek yogurt (if dairy is okay) are good alternatives to protein powder.

    Recipe Instructions

    Add all of the ingredients to a high speed blend and puree. Taste and adjust sweetness and any additional spice. Enjoy!

    Chef's Tip: Make Your Own Plant-Based Milk
    Homemade plant milks taste better, cost less, and let you control the ingredients-no gums, thickeners, carrageenan, or fillers. Each one has a slightly different texture and flavor, so pick what works best for your smoothie or dietary needs. Try one of my easy recipes:

    • Homemade Almond Milk
    • Homemade Hemp Seed Milk
    • Homemade Coconut Milk
    • Homemade Cashew Milk

    Serving Suggestions

    Serve immediately, chilled, in a tall glass. Garnish with a sprinkle of cinnamon or toasted coconut flakes for a tropical touch. Pour into a to-go jar for a quick breakfast on the run. Freeze leftovers in popsicle molds for a healthy, kid-friendly treat.

    How to Choose a Protein Powder

    • Choose one with an understandable ingredient list. The shorter, the better.
    • If sweetened, look for whole leaf stevia or monk fruit, which is natural and safer versus sugar or hidden forms of sugar.
    • Be aware of sodium levels. Lower is better. Compare brands.
    • No artificial flavors, fillers, colors, no artificial anything is best.
    • Be aware of what one serving provides in terms of grams of protein.
    • Don't choose only on price.
    • Look for a single serving, travel or trial size before investing in a tub, as protein powders are pricey.

    Experiment for yourselves and discover what works best for your body. It is all about bio-individuality and every body is different.

    Closeup of a coconut mango smoothie in a glass garnished with mango.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I make this smoothie ahead of time?

    It's best enjoyed fresh, but you can store it in the fridge for up to 24 hours. Just give it a quick stir or shake before drinking.

    Can I use light coconut milk instead of full-fat?

    Yes! Light coconut milk works fine and will make the smoothie a little thinner and lower in calories.

    Can I leave out the banana?

    You can-just expect a thinner texture, and it won't be quite as creamy. If it's the sugar you are concerned about, buy green bananas (lower in sugar) and be sure to use a sugar-free sweetener.

    More Smoothie Recipes

    For more smoothie recipes check out the smoothie recipe index page.

    • Beautiful bright pink red beet smoothies in tall glasses with red beets on the side.
      Healthy Red Beet Smoothie with Berries
    • Creamy light green cucumber mint smoothie in a glass with lime slice.
      Refreshing Cucumber Smoothie Recipe
    • A bright yellow mango pineapple smoothie in a glass with lime and fruit wedge.
      Tropical Mango Pineapple Smoothie
    • Creamy orange pumpkin pie smoothie in a glass with a silver straw.
      Pumpkin Smoothie (Healthy & Easy)

    Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this mango coconut smoothie, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    coconut mango smoothie

    Spiced Mango Coconut Smoothie

    Sally Cameron
    Transport yourself to the islands for breakfast with this tropical smoothie. Whip one up in seconds for an easy start to your day. Frozen mango makes a frostier, colder smoothie. If using fresh mango, add a few ice cubes if desired. To make a thinner smoothie use more water and less coconut milk.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Total Time 5 minutes mins
    Course Beverage, Breakfast
    Cuisine American, Hawaiian
    Servings 1
    Calories 371 kcal

    Equipment

    • blender

    Ingredients
      

    • ¼ cup unsweetened canned coconut milk
    • 1 cup unsweetened almond milk
    • ¼ cup diced mango fresh or frozen
    • ½ small banana
    • 1-2 scoops protein powder of choice
    • ½ teaspoon cinnamon nutmeg and turmeric
    • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract
    • a little liquid vanilla stevia or monk fruit optional sweetener

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Place everything in a blender and puree on high speed until smooth. If it is too thick and the motor is grinding, add a bit more water.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 371kcalCarbohydrates: 26gProtein: 29gFat: 20gSaturated Fat: 13gCholesterol: 50mgSodium: 380mgPotassium: 505mgFiber: 5gSugar: 16gVitamin A: 562IUVitamin C: 21mgCalcium: 425mgIron: 3mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Crispy Baked Parmesan Potatoes (Sliced & Oven-Roasted)

    04/29/2014 by Sally Cameron 7 Comments

    Parmesan potato wedges

    Cheesy, crispy, and baked to perfection, these baked parmesan potatoes are for every potato lover! With a golden, crunchy Parmesan crust and savory garlic flavor, they're perfect for pairing with roast chicken or serving at weekend brunch. For easy prep, cook the potatoes ahead of time, then bake them to irresistible crispiness when ready. This is simple comfort food at its best! Air fryer instructions included.

    A gray platter of crispy golden parmesan potato slices.

    With a couple of golds potatoes to use up, I simmered them whole until tender then parked them in the refrigerator. The next day, chilled potatoes meant easy slicing for roasting into golden wedges. Parboiling first is the secret. When baked, those edges turn crispy and golden in the oven while the centers stay tender, and a shower of garlic and Parmesan makes these parmesan potatoes irresistible.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why Baked Parmesan Potatoes is a Must Make

    • Simple ingredients - Nothing fancy or hard to find.
    • Make-ahead friendly - Parboil or steam earlier in the day, then roast to crisp perfection before serving.
    • Oven-baked for best results: You can air fry, but most baskets are too small for more than two servings. The oven allows for even crisping and enough space to feed a crowd.
    • Crispy outside, creamy inside: That golden Parmesan crust meets tender, fluffy potatoes.
    • Versatile pairing: Perfect with chicken, steak, or salmon-and a natural fit for any season.

    If you love the combination of potatoes and Parmesan, try these easy baby dutch yellow potatoes.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    • Potatoes: Use large yellow or gold potatoes (Yukon Gold included). They're mid-starch, thin-skinned, and roast up creamy inside with crisp edges. Skip russets (too floury) and very waxy types (won't crisp as well).
    • Olive oil: A good extra-virgin for drizzling over slices before baking.
    • Garlic: Granulated garlic (or garlic powder) is best as fresh garlic burns at roasting temps.
    • Parmesan cheese: Finely grated Parmigiano-Reggiano (pre-grated is fine, freshly grated is best). The fine grate melts into a lacy, crispy crust.
    • Herbs: Fresh chives for color and a mild onion pop. Optional but great: minced rosemary or thyme; chopped parsley for a fresh finish.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt, and pepper.

    Garlic and Parmesan potatoes are terrific with simple baked bone-in chicken breasts for an easy dinner.

    Chef's Tip: Yellow, Gold, and Yukon Gold Potatoes

    Yellow potatoes and gold potatoes are in the same broad category of yellow-fleshed potatoes. A Yukon Gold is a specific hybrid potato variety developed in Canada. Yukon Golds just taste a bit more buttery, thanks to their yellow-and-white potato parentage. All have a creamy, tender texture, and fall between drier fleshed russets and waxy potato varieties. In general, yellow and gold potatoes are interchangeable because they have similar buttery, creamy textures and are versatile all-purpose potatoes, so whatever you can find will work for baked parmesan potatoes.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Use a different cheese, such as a finely grated Spanish Manchego, or other Italian options such as Asiago, Pecorino Romano, Romano cheese, or Grana Padano.
    • Instead of chives, use fresh chopped Italian parsley.

    Chef's Tip - Steam or Simmer Potatoes (Both Work):
    Steaming potatoes keeps the interior a bit drier and fluffier, which helps the wedges crisp faster in the oven. Gentle simmering softens just as well but adds a touch more surface moisture-still great, just give them a few extra minutes to dry on the sheet before roasting. Make-ahead friendly: steam or simmer a day ahead, refrigerate, the slice and and finish in the oven before serving.

    How to Make Baked Parmesan Potatoes (oven)

    Prefer the air fryer? It works beautifully for smaller batches-see the recipe card for full air fryer directions and timing.

    Step 1: Cover potatoes with cold lightly salted water and simmer until tender when you can stick a fine metal skewer through, or steam until the same tenderness in a large pot fitted with a steamer basket and tight lid. Drain potatoes, peel, cool and refrigerate until chilled. Peels can be left on if preferred.

    Note - potatoes can be prepared up to

    Slicing cooked potatoes on a walnut cutting board, slices on a foil lined baking tray.

    Step 2: To bake and finish, slice the potatoes cross-wise into wedges about ½″ thick. Lay wedges flat on a parchment paper lined or aluminum foil lined baking sheet.

    Drizzling olive oil over gold potato slices on a foil lined baking sheet.

    Drizzle potatoes slices with olive oil and sprinkle with salt, pepper and granulated garlic, then sprinkle on the grated Parmesan cheese. Bake until a golden with a crisp crust. For a crispier crust, turn on the broiler but watch closely so the cheese doesn't burn.

    Slices of raw potatoes on a foil lined tray for baking sprinkled with parmesan cheese.

    To serve sprinkle with chopped chives or parsley.

    Chef's Tip - Foil vs. Parchment:
    Lining the pan with foil gives slightly crisper results, since foil conducts heat and helps the Parmesan form that golden crust. If you prefer to avoid foil, parchment works fine-the potatoes just won't brown quite as deeply on the bottom. Another option, use nonstick foil; it releases beautifully and keeps the melted Parmesan from sticking.

    Air Fryer Instructions (Batch Cooking)

    Because air fryers run hotter and more efficiently than ovens, these sliced Parmesan potatoes will need a lower temperature than the 425°F oven method. I recommend starting at:

    • 375°F for 10-14 minutes, turning once halfway through, until golden and crisp at the edges.
    • Arrange the slices in a single layer (do not stack). Because they lay flat, you will need to cook in batches depending on the size of your air fryer.
    • Keep finished batches warm on a sheet pan in a 200°F oven while you finish the rest.

    Note: I will update this section after more air fryer testing (just got a new one) for the most precise timing.

    Serving Suggestions

    Baked parmesan potatoes are terrific with roast chicken, grilled meats, or a pork roast. They are also great breakfast or brunch with eggs. Try them with steamed salmon, halibut, or cod.

    Recipe FAQs

    What type of potatoes work best?

    Use yellow or gold potatoes (including Yukon Gold, which is a specific variety in the yellow family). They're creamy, thin-skinned, and hold shape while crisping. Skip russets (too dry/starchy; better for mash/baked). Red potatoes can work but are waxier-slice a bit thinner and roast a little longer for similar crisping.

    Can I make them without peeling the potatoes?

    Yes. Peel or don't, your call. Skins add nutrition and a little texture. When you steam or simmer whole first, the skins slip off easily while warm. If peeling, don't peel first.

    What can I use if I don't have fresh Parmesan?

    Swap in finely grated cheeses that crisp well: Manchego, Asiago, Pecorino Romano, Romano, or Grana Padano. All give their own delicious flavor.

    Can I make them ahead of time?

    Yes. Steam or gently simmer whole potatoes until just tender, peel (if peeling), cool, and refrigerate up to 3 days. When ready to serve, slice into wedges about ½" thick, season, add Parmesan, and roast until golden and crisp.

    Can I make parmesan potatoes in my air fryer?

    Yes-but it depends on your air fryer's size. A 6-quart basket model comfortably fits about two servings at a time; for more, cook in batches and keep warm while you finish the rest. If you have a larger air-fryer oven or toaster-oven style, you can roast more at once. For family-size portions, the oven still gives the best, most even crisping.

    More Potato Recipes

    If you love potatoes (and who doesn't), try some of these potato recipes for your potato lovers.

    • Baby dutch yellow potatoes wtih herbs and Parmesan cheese.
      Buttery Baby Dutch Yellow Potatoes
    • Whipped sweet potatoes ready for serving in a gray bowl.
      Simple Whipped Sweet Potatoes Recipe
    • White bowl of golden browned air fryer red potatoes with rosemary.
      Air Fryer Red Potatoes (or oven roasted)
    • scalloped potatoes gratin
      Cheesy Scalloped Potatoes

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make garlic and Parmesan potatoes, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Baked Parmesan Potatoes | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Baked Parmesan Potatoes

    Sally Cameron
    Crisp, golden potato wedges baked Parmesan potatoes are delicious for breakfast, brunch or dinner. Cook the potatoes ahead and bake them when you are ready to eat. Air fryer notes at the bottom.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 20 minutes mins
    Cook Time 30 minutes mins
    Total Time 50 minutes mins
    Course Side Dish
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4 servings
    Calories 232 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    Baked parmesan potatoes

    • 1 ½ pounds large gold potatoes
    • 1 ½ - 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
    • ½ teaspoon granulated garlic powder
    • ½ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
    • ⅓ -½ cup finely grated Parmesan cheese

    Optional garnish

    • 1 tablespoon chopped chives or parsley

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Pre-cook potatoes (simmering)

    • Scrub potatoes and place in a large pot, cover by 1-inch with cold water and a little salt. Bring almost to a boil, turn down to a simmer. Simmer until tender when pierced through with a thin metal skewer, about 20-25 minutes. Cook time depends on the potato size. Peel if desired.
      Store potatoes in an air tight container for up to 3 days before baking to serve.

    Pre-cook potatoes (steaming)

    • Scrub potatoes. Ready a large pot with a tight fitting lid and a steamer basket. Fill with cold water to the bottom of the steamer basket and bring to a boil where steam is coming out of the pot. Add potatoes and steam until tender when pierced through with a thin metal skewer, about 20-25 minutes. Cook time depends on the potato size. Peel if desired.
      Store potatoes in an air tight container for up to 3 days before baking to serve.

    Baking potatoes to serve

    • Pre-heat oven to 425°. Line a half sheet baking pan with foil or parchment, Slice potatoes crosswise into approximately ½" wedges. Lay potatoes flat on a baking sheet. Drizzle potatoes with olive oil, then sprinkle with garlic, salt, and pepper, then finish with cheese. Bake until potatoes are hot, crisp and golden. If you need them faster, broil then in a pre-heated broiler until crisp and golden, watching so the cheese does not burn.
      Sprinkle with fresh chopped herbs for serving if desired.

    Notes

    Air Fryer Directions:
    Preheat your air fryer to 400°F (or 425°F if your model allows higher heat). Lightly oil the basket or tray and arrange the potatoes in a single layer, leaving space between pieces for airflow.
    Air-fry for 18–22 minutes, until the potatoes are crisp and golden and the Parmesan has formed a lacy crust. If your air fryer runs hot or you’re cooking smaller wedges, start checking at 15–18 minutes—they can brown fast once they crisp.
    • A 6-quart basket fits about 2 servings; for more, cook in batches and keep warm at 200°F.
    • Toaster-oven style or dual-drawer air fryers can handle larger batches with more even browning.
    • The oven remains the best choice for full sheet-pan, family-size portions.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 232kcalCarbohydrates: 21gProtein: 5gFat: 15gSaturated Fat: 3gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 9gCholesterol: 7mgSodium: 298mgPotassium: 500mgFiber: 3gSugar: 1gVitamin A: 107IUVitamin C: 23mgCalcium: 89mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    French Potato Salad

    07/01/2014 by Sally Cameron 9 Comments

    Mediterranean potato salad

    French potato salad gives classic potato salad a French twist. With tender potatoes, zesty lemon, briny capers, creamy Dijon mustard, lots of fresh herbs, shallots, just a touch of mayonnaise ensures it's creamy and moist without being heavy. Whether you're planning a picnic, a backyard barbecue, or simply dinner, French potato salad is always a hit. Make it a day ahead to save time, it's even better.

    Closeup of mediterranean style potato salad with a wooden spoon for serving.

    This French-style potato salad is one of my summer favorites and go-to potato salad recipes for summer meals and entertaining. It has light bright flavors and a creamy texture without being gooey or overpowering. And if you love French flavors, this potato salad is for you.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • Such good potato salad and easy to make.
    • Perfect for a summer meal.
    • Sure to please potato salad lovers.
    • Easily made ahead.

    Potato Salad Ingredients

    Ingredients for french potato salad in bowls on a marble counter.

    Here's your shopping list for French style potato salad:

    • Potatoes: Use gold potatoes or yellow potatoes for potato salad. They are creamy, buttery tasting, and thin-skinned with golden flesh. They hold up beautifully and don't fall apart like russet potatoes.
    • Celery: For flavor and crunch.
    • Shallot: Softer flavored than onion and adds just a little color.
    • Capers: For that salty, briny flavor.
    • Herbs: Fresh dill and fresh Italian parsley are key and tarragon gives it French flair. A
    • Mayonnaise: Just a little mayo in the dressing gives it creaminess without being heavy. Use your favorite or here's the mayo I use for it's light clean flavor (and good if you are sensitive to eggs or want it vegan).
    • Lemon: For a bright lift of flavor and acidity.
    • Mustard: Use Dijon mustard for it's complex flavor with a kick. Creamy style is good or use both creamy and whole grain mustard.
    • Garlic: A must for flavor! Fresh cloves are best but you can use the organic paste in the tube.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements.

    Perfectly cubed cooked potatoes for potato salad in chef's hands over a bowl.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • If you like hard boiled eggs in potato salad, add a couple of chopped hard boiled eggs. Try my method for making perfect easy peel hard boiled eggs.
    • Don't like Dijon mustard? Use your favorite old fashioned yellow mustard or a grainy mustard.
    • Swap the lemon juice for vinegar, using champagne vinegar or apple cider vinegar.
    • No fresh herbs? Use dried herbs at ⅓ to ½ the amount of fresh, but try to get at least fresh parsley for color and better flavor.
    • Fresh thyme is a nice substitution for tarragon or dill. Using a combination is good.
    • No shallots? Use finely chopped red onion. After chopping, rinse them in cold water to remove some of the pungency, the dried well before adding to the potato salad.
    • Fennel seed is another nice herbal addition and fennel seed it great for digestion.
    • No gold potatoes? Swap red potatoes.
    • For color, sprinkle the top with sliced green onion or chives.

    Recipe Instructions

    How to Cook Potatoes

    Scrub whole potatoes, then simmer in a large pot of salted water (enough water to cover the potatoes) until tender when pierced with a thin metal skewer like a cake tester. Cook until potatoes are tender all of the way through, but don't let them fall apart.

    How long to boil potatoes for potato salad? Until they are done is the honest answer. You have to check until they are just right. It's about 18-20 minutes.

    While the potatoes are cooking make your mayo-based dressing.

    To Peel or Not to Peel

    You can peel potatoes or not. It's up to you.

    • Cool hot potatoes until you can handle them, then peel with a paring knife (the peels should slip right off). Refrigerate until cold.
    • Cool and chill potatoes completely leaving the peel on. If you change your mind you can peel them after chilling.

    Cold potatoes are much easier to dice into clean cubes, making for a nice presentation. Either leave those skins on (they are good for you) or peel them. When they are just cool enough to handle they peel easily.

    Mixing potato salad in a silver bowl with green herbs and chopped onion.

    Finish the Potato Salad

    After the potatoes are cooked and cold, cut potatoes into small cubes (about ¾"), adding to a large mixing bowl. To the cubed potatoes, add the rest of the ingredients saving the dressing for last.

    For brighter lemon, use the zest too. Sometimes we like it with the addition of fennel seed for a light, sweet licorice flavor. All flavors of the sunny South of France.

    Can You Make French Potato Salad Ahead of Time?

    Absolutely! To save time, simmer your potatoes, chill and dice a day or two ahead. Chop your celery and shallot, rinse the capers and ready your herbs. You can make the dressing completely if you want and fold together with the potatoes the morning of serving.

    Adding mayonnaise to a bowl of potato salad as the finishing step.

    Serving Suggestions

    Herbed potato salad is terrific with grilled meats such as this lemon grilled chicken, baby back ribs, burgers, or steak. It goes with just about anything. Serve chilled or at room temperature.

    Store leftovers in an airtight container for up to 4 days.

    Summer Food Safety for Potato Salad

    If you are serving outdoors on a hot summer day, keep it cold as long as possible, on ice if possible for food safety. If you can't keep it cold, it is safe to serve for up to two hours or only one hour if 90°F or higher outside.

    Small white bowls of creamy potato salad for serving with forks.

    Potato Nutrition and Resistant Starch

    Potatoes get a bad rap as a starchy vegetable, especially for those on a low-carb diet but gold potatoes are a good source of vitamin C, potassium and fiber. When cooked and eaten cold potatoes provide something called resistant starch.

    Resistant starch is a unique kind of fiber that's important for gut health and if your gut is healthy, so are you. Resistant starch resists digestion, feeding the trillions of helpful bacteria in your gut. Read more about it here.

    And seriously, can you live without potatoes? Not in this house. Potatoes are part of a varied and healthy diet.

    Small white bowls of Mediterranean potato salad ready to serve on wood table.

    Recipe FAQs

    What makes French potato salad different from other potato salads?

    French potato salad features ingredients and flavors prominent in French cooking, such as Dijon mustard, capers, shallots instead of onions, and fresh herbs such dill and tarragon. French potato salad is usually lighter than other styles of potato salad.

    Do you use mayonnaise in French potato salad?

    Some recipes use a little mayo, just enough for moisture and a little creaminess and others use a Dijon mustard vinaigrette. Both work well.

    How do you prevent French potato salad from becoming dry?

    To ensure French potato salad is moist and flavorful, use enough dressing without over doing it. If you make it ahead of time, you might need a little extra dressing if the potatoes absorb it. How much dressing is a personal preference.

    What are some variations of French potato salad?

    Instead of gold potatoes, use red skinned potatoes. Add fennel seed along with the fresh herbs. Try using a combination of whole grain Dijon mustard as well as creamy Dijon mustard. lastly, try adding a little finely chopped fresh fennel. All of these ideas will help you to customize your French potato salad if desired.

    More Summer Recipe Ideas

    For more Mediterranean flavors try my Mediterranean chicken recipe or this terrific lemony gluten-free pasta salad.

    • Fruit kabobs with watermelon, cantaloupe, and honeydew melons.
      Fruit Kabobs With Melon
    • Watermelon salad ready to serve with cucumber, feta, basil, shallots.
      Easy Watermelon Basil Salad with Feta Cheese
    • Closeup of grilled corn on the cob with herb butter.
      Grilled Corn on the Cob with Garlic Herb Butter
    • A single layer sweet cherry cake with golden top on white plate.
      Cherry Clafoutis (Easy Fresh Cherry Dessert)

    ⭐️Did you Make This Recipe?

    If you make this herbed potato salad? If so, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Mediterranean potato salad

    French Potato Salad

    Sally Cameron
    A classic summer side, this potato salad  borrows from flavors of the Mediterranean with dill, lemon and capers. Cook potatoes a day ahead for easy assembly. If you don't like dill, try thyme or tarragon. For more herbs, add chopped parsley and even a little fennel seed for more Mediterranean flavor. For brighter lemon flavor, use zest as well.
    5 from 2 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 25 minutes mins
    Chill time 1 hour hr
    Total Time 1 hour hr 35 minutes mins
    Course Side Dish, vegetables
    Cuisine American
    Servings 8
    Calories 143 kcal

    Equipment

    • A large pot to cook potatoes

    Ingredients
      

    • 2 ¼ pounds Yukon Gold potatoes 5 large potatoes
    • ½ cup finely chopped celery 2-3 ribs
    • ⅓ cup finely chopped shallot substitute onion
    • 1-2 tablespoons capers rinsed and drained
    • 1 tablespoon finely chopped fresh Italian parsley
    • 1 tablespoon finely chopped fresh dill
    • ½ tablespoon chopped fresh tarragon or thyme sub 1 teaspoon dried
    • ¼ cup mayonnaise or Vegenaise
    • 1 tablespoon lemon juice
    • 1 large garlic clove finely minced or zested
    • 1 tablespoon Dijon mustard
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Cook potatoes

    • Scrub potatoes and leave peel on. Place potatoes in a medium pot and add a little salt. Cover with cold water and bring to just under a boil. Turn down heat and simmer potatoes until completely tender when pierced with a thin metal skewer like a cake tester, 18-20 minutes.
      Drain potatoes, cool and refrigerate until cold. Gently peel potatoes with a paring knife, the skins almost slide off. You can do this a day ahead and keep potatoes refrigerated.
      Note - You can also peel potatoes when they are just cool enough to handle, then refrigerate whole.

    Finish potato salad

    • Dice cold potatoes into approximately ¾″ cubes and place in a medium bowl. Add celery, shallot, capers, dill, parsley. In a small bowl, stir or whisk together the vegenaise, lemon juice, garlic, and mustard until smooth, then gently fold into the potatoes until the they are well coated. Adjust seasoning with salt and pepper if needed, and add extra lemon or herbs if desired.
      Keep potato salad covered and refrigerated until serving time. May be served chilled or closer to room temperature.

    Notes

    • If you like hard boiled eggs in potato salad, add a couple of chopped hard boiled eggs. Try my method for making perfect easy peel hard boiled eggs.
    • Don't like Dijon mustard? Use your favorite old fashioned yellow mustard if preferred.
    • No fresh herbs? Use dried herbs at ⅓ to ½ the amount of fresh, but try to get at least fresh parsley for color and better flavor.
    • No shallots? Use finely chopped red onion. After chopping, rinse them in cold water to remove some of the pungency, the dried well before adding to the potato salad.
    • For vegan potato salad, be sure to use a no-egg mayo.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 143kcalCarbohydrates: 23gProtein: 3gFat: 5gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.1gMonounsaturated Fat: 0.1gSodium: 174mgPotassium: 535mgFiber: 3gSugar: 2gVitamin A: 38IUVitamin C: 24mgCalcium: 23mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Gluten-Free Zucchini Muffins

    08/17/2014 by Sally Cameron 9 Comments

    Zucchini Applesauce Muffins | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Gluten-free zucchini muffins are easy to make, naturally sweetened, and absolutely delicious. Not sure about zucchini in muffins? If the idea surprises your family, just don't mention it. Once they've polished off one of these soft, moist muffins, then you can let them in on the secret. With applesauce and honey instead of white sugar, these muffins feel wholesome but taste like a bakery treat. Perfect for breakfast, snacks, or packing in lunchboxes-bake a batch and see for yourself.

    Zucchini Applesauce Muffins | AFoodCentricLife.com

    I may have gotten a little carried away at the farmers market-too much zucchini, and then I realized I'd be home alone for the week. Oops. I love grilling zucchini, sautéing it, or spiralizing it into zucchini noodles, but I wanted to try something different. Baking sounded like just the thing-and it turns out, these muffins were the perfect solution for too much zucchini.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love This Recipe

    • Soft, moist, and naturally sweet - Just applesauce and honey.
    • Easy to make and freezer-friendly - Great for meal prep, snacks, or quick breakfasts.
    • A smart way to use extra zucchini - Win over even the skeptical eaters.

    Recipe Ingredients

    • Gluten-free flour blend - I use King Arthur Measure for Measure; it performs well without needing additional binders.
    • Aluminum-free baking powder - Gives lift with a clean flavor.
    • Baking soda - Reacts with the applesauce and honey for added rise and browning.
    • Cinnamon - Adds warmth and subtle complexity.
    • Unsweetened applesauce - Naturally sweetens the muffins and keeps them moist
    • Mild honey - Adds gentle sweetness and pairs well with the zucchini and spice.
    • Egg - Binds the batter and helps with structure.
    • Vanilla extract - Enhances the overall flavor.
    • Oil - Coconut oil (melted), avocado oil, or a healthy neutral oil, keeps the muffins tender and dairy-free.
    • Zucchini - Grate and squeeze dry to remove excess moisture.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Add orange zest - Brightens the flavor with a hint of citrus.
    • Try Five Spice instead of cinnamon.
    • Chopped walnuts - Add crunch and richness if desired.

    Please see recipe card for measurements and salt.

    Recipe Instructions

    Zucchini, like all vegetables, contain a lot of water. To bake with zucchini, grate it on the large holes of a box grater, then place grated zucchini in layers of paper towels or a clean kitchen towel and squeeze it dry.

    Zucchini Applesauce Muffins|AFoodCentricLife.com

    Chef's tool tip on digital kitchen scales: When baking, weigh them using a digital kitchen scale. Weighing dry ingredients (especially gluten-free flours) gives you the best results, is fast and accurate. A scale is an inexpensive and terrific investment if you don't have one.

    Zucchini Applesauce Muffins|AFoodCentricLife.com

    Baking Tips for Success

    • Use light colored metal muffin pans to bake, not the dark ones. It makes a difference.
    • Skip paper liners and spray wells with non-stick or oil with coconut oil
    • Remove the baked muffins from the pan right after baking. They will be soft, so handle gently. You don't want them to steam in the pan. Cool on a wire rack.
    • To easily remove muffins from pan, use a mini off-set spatula. It is a handy and inexpensive too for many things in the kitchen.

    Serving Suggestions

    • Serve zucchini muffins warm with coffee or tea for a light breakfast
    • As a snack with a smear of almond, peanut butte, or maple butter.
    • Packed in lunchboxes for kids or grown-ups
    • Alongside eggs, yogurt, and a fresh fruit salad for a balanced morning meal.
    • With a drizzle of honey or maple syrup if you want a touch more sweetness.

    Storing and Freezing

    Let muffins cool completely, then store them in an airtight container or zip-top bag at room temperature for up to 4-5 days. For best freshness, keep them in a cool, dry spot out of direct sunlight.

    Gluten-free zucchini muffins freeze very well. Let them cool completely, then wrap tightly or store in a freezer-safe container. Thaw at room temp or rewarm gently.

    Recipe FAQs

    Do I need to peel the zucchini first?

    There's no need to peel zucchini before making muffins. The skin is thin and softens during baking. Plus, it adds color and nutrients.

    Can I taste the zucchini in the muffins?

    Not really. It adds moisture and softness, but the flavor is mild and blends in with the applesauce, honey, and spice.

    Can I make them egg-free?

    Yes. Use a flax egg, chia egg, or egg replacer. The texture may be slightly softer, but should work well.

    More Baking Recipes

    There's nothing like a homemade baked treat that's healthy and easy to make too. Try one of these easy baking recipes. They are all gluten-free.

    • A single piece of gluten-free cornbread on a white plate with silver fork with pieces stacked behind.
      Gluten Free Cornbread (no flour)
    • A golden loaf of pumpkin bread sliced and ready to enjoy with coffee.
      Easy Gluten-Free Pumpkin Bread Recipe
    • Gluten Free Strawberry Muffins
    • carrot cake muffins
      Gluten-Free Carrot Cake Muffins (dairy-free)

    Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make these gluten-free zucchini muffins, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Zucchini Applesauce Muffins | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Zucchini Applesauce Muffins

    Sally Cameron
    These golden, moist gluten-free muffins are hard to resist. Smear them with coconut butter and enjoy. For the flour blend I used the whole-grain flour mix recipe from Gluten-Free Baking for Dummies. It's a good substitute for whole wheat flour in many recipes. I also tested these muffins with Bob's Red Mill all-purpose gluten-free flour blend with good results.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 32 minutes mins
    Total Time 47 minutes mins
    Course Breakfast, Snack
    Cuisine American
    Servings 12 muffins
    Calories 385 kcal

    Equipment

    • Light colored 12-cup muffin pan

    Ingredients
      

    Muffins

    • 2 cups GF flour blend I use King Arthur measure for Measure
    • 1 ½ teaspoons aluminum-free baking powder
    • 1 teaspoon baking soda
    • ¾ teaspoon Cinnamon or Chinese five Spice
    • ¼ teaspoon salt
    • 1 ½ cups unsweetened applesauce 13 ounces
    • ½ cup mild honey
    • 1 large egg
    • 1 large orange zested
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • ⅓ cup coconut oil melted if solid
    • 8 ounces zucchini 1 ⅓ cups after grating a squeezing dry
    • ¾ cup chopped walnuts optional

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Pre-heat oven to 325ºF. Blend flours: Weigh flours in a bowl on a digital kitchen scale. Whisk together well to combine completely. Place in an airtight container and label.  You will use part for the muffins and have extra for another baking project.
    • Add 285 grams (2 cups) of the flour blend to the bowl, then add in salt, spice, baking powder and soda. Whisk well to combine.
    • In a separate bowl, stir applesauce honey, egg, zest, vanilla, and oil. Add dry ingredients to wet ingredients. Using a hand electric mixer, beat on medium high for 1-2 minutes.
    • For zucchini, trim off ends and grate on the large holes of a box grater. Place grated zucchini on layers of paper towels or a clean kitchen towel and squeeze out as much moisture as possible. You want dry zucchini. Next, fold zucchini and walnuts into batter.
    • Spray a light colored standard size muffin pan with non-stick spray. Portion batter evenly into the wells. Bake for approximately 32 minutes or until muffins are golden brown and firm to the touch, and a toothpick inserted into the center comes out clean.
    • Remove pan from oven and carefully remove each muffin to a wire rack to cook as quickly as possible. Don't let them sit in the pan and steam. Enjoy warm or cool completely and store at room temperature in a zip bag. Muffins will keep for a few days.

    Notes

     
    •  

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1muffinCalories: 385kcalCarbohydrates: 64gProtein: 7gFat: 13gSaturated Fat: 6gPolyunsaturated Fat: 4gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gTrans Fat: 0.002gCholesterol: 16mgSodium: 190mgPotassium: 244mgFiber: 5gSugar: 18gVitamin A: 105IUVitamin C: 12mgCalcium: 78mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Creamed Pearl Onions

    11/19/2014 by Sally Cameron 8 Comments

    Creamed pearl onions in a silver serving dish with a silver spoon sprinkled with fresh herbs.

    Creamed pearl onions are a classic holiday side dish, with tender, sweet onions nestled in a rich, savory cream sauce. A longtime family favorite at Thanksgiving and Christmas, this nostalgic recipe is naturally gluten-free, with no flour or roux needed. Make it with heavy cream or canned coconut milk for a dairy-free option, and I'll show you an easy trick for peeling those little onions without the fuss.

    An oval silver serving dish with creamed pearl onions and a silver spoon.

    These old-fashioned creamed pearl onions were a fixture on my family's holiday menu growing up. When I went gluten-free, I adapted the traditional flour-based cream sauce into a simple, no-roux version that keeps the same rich flavor and creamy texture. It's an easy make-ahead side dish that's just as good with Thanksgiving turkey as it is with Easter ham or a Christmas roast.

    Pearl Onions Recipe Snapshot

    • Classic holiday favorite - A tradition that never goes out of style.
    • Pairs beautifully - Perfect alongside roast turkey, beef tenderloin, or ham.
    • Make-ahead friendly - Cook and chill the day before, then gently reheat for dinner.

    If you love onions, try the French Onion soup with cheesy golden Parmesan croutons.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Ingredients for creamed onions on the counter in prep bowls.
    • Pearl onions - Fresh onions offer the best texture and sweetness. Choose uniformly sized onions, about ¾-1 inch across.
    • Cream - Heavy cream gives the sauce classic richness.
    • Cornstarch - Thickens the sauce without flour or a roux.
    • Balsamic vinegar - An optional splash adds depth and a subtle sweet-tangy note.
    • Thyme - Adds a delicate herbal flavor. Use fresh or dried.
    • Pepper - White pepper keeps the sauce creamy-looking without black specks, but either works.
    • Nutmeg - Just a pinch adds warmth. Ground mace is another option.
    • Parmesan - Adds a savory, salty finish. Omit for dairy-free or substitute a dairy-free Parmesan alternative.

    Please see the recipe card for all ingredients and measurements, salt and pepper.

    Chef's note: What are pearl onions? Pearl onions are small, mild onions, typically ¾-1 inch in diameter, available in white, gold, or purple varieties. They're usually sold in mesh bags or clamshells. If you can't find them, small boiler onions are a good substitute. They're slightly larger and may need a few extra minutes to become tender. Choose onions of similar size for even cooking.

    For another terrific onion side dish, try these roasted red onions with balsamic.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Color and sweetness - Add cooked green peas at the end.
    • Smoky richness - Stir in chopped, crisp bacon or crisp pancetta.
    • Dairy-free creaminess - Replace heavy cream with full-fat canned coconut milk.
    • Grain-free thickening - Use arrowroot instead of cornstarch (add off the boil to keep it silky).

    Chef's tip for no-dairy creamed pearl onions: Full-fat coconut milk works beautifully in this recipe, without a noticeable coconut flavor. I made a dairy-free batch one Thanksgiving and had several people taste it. Everyone loved it! When I asked whether they could taste coconut, they looked at me like I was crazy. No one could tell.

    How to Make Creamed Pearl Onions

    Start by setting up an ice bath for the onions. Fill a large bowl half full of ice and fill with cold water.

    Step 1: Peel the onions. Bring a large pot of water (5-6 quarts) to a boil. Add the onions and cook for 1 - 1 ½ minutes. Remove immediately with a slotted spoon or small strainer to the ice batch to chock and stop the cooking process. Chill onions until cold, about 3 minutes. Drain onions.

    Step 2: With a paring knife, trim a small piece of the root end off the onion then slip the skin off to peel.

    Step 3: Make the sauce. Add the cornstarch to a small dish with an equal amount of water and blend until smooth. Add the cream or coconut milk to a 3 quart pan and bring to a boil, turn the heat down a bit, add the cornstarch slurry and whisk until smooth and thickened. Cook 1 minute to remove any raw cornstarch taste.

    Step 4: Stir in ⅓ cup water, then add the onions, balsamic, thyme, salt, pepper. Cover the pan and cook on low, simmering gently for 15-20 minutes until the onions are tender when pierced with the tip of a sharp paring knife. When done, stir in parmesan and nutmeg.

    Creamed pearl onions are great served alongside these green beans almondine, another classic, always welcome side dish.

    Make-Ahead Creamed Pearl Onions

    Save time on busy cooking days by prepping ahead. Peel the onions a day or two in advance and finish the recipe on the day of serving, or prepare the entire dish and simply reheat before dinner.

    Warm gently in a small pan over low heat, covered, or place in an ovenproof dish at 350°F, covered, until hot. Add a splash of milk, cream, or water if the sauce thickens-just enough to loosen it back to silky.

    Creamy pearl onions on the dinner table.

    Serving Suggestions

    • Holiday favorites - Serve creamed pearl onions alongside roast turkey, beef tenderloin, prime rib, roast chicken, or Easter ham.
    • Complementary sides - Pair with mashed potatoes or roasted potatoes and a colorful green vegetable, such as green beans or roasted Brussels sprouts.
    • Finishing touches - Garnish with fresh thyme leaves, chopped parsley, or a light sprinkle of Parmesan cheese just before serving.

    Here's a recipe roundup with more Thanksgiving gluten-free and dairy-free recipe ideas.

    Storage & Reheating

    • Refrigerate - Cool promptly and refrigerate in an airtight container for up to 4 days.
    • Freeze - Not recommended. Cream and coconut milk sauces can separate or become grainy after freezing and thawing.
    • Stovetop reheating - Reheat gently over low heat, stirring occasionally. Add a splash of cream, milk, or water to loosen the sauce if needed. Avoid boiling.
    • Oven reheating - Cover and warm at 325°F for approximately 15-20 minutes, or until heated through. Add a splash of liquid if the sauce has thickened.
    • Make ahead - Prepare up to 2 days in advance, refrigerate, and gently reheat before serving. Taste and adjust the seasoning just before serving.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I use frozen or canned pearl onions?

    Frozen peeled pearl onions are a convenient shortcut, although they're generally smaller than fresh. Cook according to package directions until just tender, then fold them into the prepared cream sauce. Canned or jarred onions aren't ideal because they tend to be soft and briny. If using them, drain and rinse well, then warm gently in the sauce.

    Do I have to peel fresh pearl onions?

    Yes, but there's an easy trick. Blanch the onions in boiling water for 1 minute, then transfer them to ice water to stop the cooking. Trim the root ends slightly and slip off the skins with your fingers or a paring knife. Once you get a rhythm going, it moves quickly. It's worth the effort!

    Can I add cheese?

    Absolutely. Parmesan adds a delicious savory finish, but Gruyère, Pecorino Romano, or Manchego are also good choices. Start with 2-4 tablespoons of finely grated cheese, stirring it into the warm sauce until melted. Taste before adding more, as some cheeses are quite salty.

    Can I make pearl onions ahead?

    Yes! Prepare them up to 2 days ahead, cool, cover, and refrigerate. Reheat gently over low heat or in a covered baking dish at 325°F until hot. If the sauce has thickened, add a splash of cream, milk, or water, then taste and adjust the seasoning.

    What if my sauce is too thin or too thick?

    If the sauce is too thin, simmer briefly to reduce it, or whisk in a little additional cornstarch slurry (½ teaspoon cornstarch mixed with ½ teaspoon cold water). If it's too thick, add warm cream, milk, or water a splash at a time until smooth and silky.

    More Holidays Side Dish Recipes

    Round out your holiday table with a few more sides everyone will love. These recipes pair beautifully with roast turkey, beef tenderloin, or ham-and they're all make-ahead friendly, and full of flavor. Explore the full Thanksgiving Recipe Index.

    • Maple roasted acorn squash slices on a gray platter with pomegranates seeds scattered on top.
      Roasted Acorn Squash
    • A bowl of bright green beans almondine with toasted buttered almonds.
      Fresh Green Beans Almondine Recipe
    • Deep red whole berry cranberry sauce in a glass bowl.
      Whole Berry Cranberry Sauce
    • A bowl of creamy mashed potatoes with melted butter and fresh chopped parsley with a silver serving spoon.
      Creamy Mashed Potatoes (With a Ricer)

    If You Make Creamed Pearl Onions

    Please let me a comment and let me know how you enjoyed them. I love hearing from you and your comments help other readers as well. Thank you!

    📖 Recipe

    Creamed pearl onions in a silver serving dish with a silver spoon sprinkled with fresh herbs.

    Creamed Pearl Onions

    Sally Cameron
    Classic creamed pearl onions in a rich, savory cream sauce with fresh thyme and a hint of nutmeg. This family-favorite holiday side dish is naturally gluten-free, easy to make ahead, and includes a dairy-free option.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 20 minutes mins
    Cook Time 20 minutes mins
    Total Time 40 minutes mins
    Course Side Dish
    Cuisine American
    Servings 6
    Calories 197 kcal

    Equipment

    • Medium pot to blanch onions 5-6 quart
    • Medium pot to cook onions 3 quart (this is a saucier if you don't have one)

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 ½ pounds pearl onions
    • 1 ½ tablespoons cornstarch or arrowroot starch
    • ⅓ cup cup water
    • 1 cup heavy cream or full fat coconut milk
    • 1-2 teaspoons Balsamic vinegar
    • 1 ½ teaspoons fresh chopped thyme leaves
    • ½ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon white pepper or black pepper, but the white disappears
    • ¼ teaspoon of granulated garlic
    • ⅛ teaspoon ground nutmeg
    • 2 tablespoons grated Parmesan cheese or vegan cheesy sprinkle optional

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Blanch and peel the onions

    • Fill a 5-6-quart pot about ¾ full with water and bring to a boil. Meanwhile, prepare an ice bath in a large bowl with cold water and plenty of ice.
      Add the pearl onions to the boiling water and blanch for 1½ minutes. Immediately transfer them to the ice bath with a slotted spoon or small strainer. Cool for a 2 minutes, then drain.
      Using a small paring knife, trim a thin slice from the root end of each onion, then slip off the papery skin.

    Make the creamed pearl onions

    • In a small bowl, mix the cornstarch with an equal amount of cold water until smooth to make a slurry.
      Pour the heavy cream or coconut milk into a 3-quart saucepan and bring to a gentle simmer over medium heat. Whisk in the cornstarch slurry and cook for about 1 minute, stirring, until the sauce begins to thicken.
      Add the peeled onions, salt, pepper, garlic, balsamic vinegar, and thyme. Cover and simmer gently for 15–20 minutes, or until the onions are tender when pierced with the tip of a paring knife.
      Stir in a pinch of nutmeg and the Parmesan, if using. Taste and adjust the seasoning before serving.

    Notes

    Onions can be prepared a day or two ahead and heated in the oven in a covered dish or on the stove top in a pan, covered, over low heat until hot.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 197kcalCarbohydrates: 14gProtein: 3gFat: 15gSaturated Fat: 9gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 4gCholesterol: 46mgSodium: 239mgPotassium: 212mgFiber: 2gSugar: 6gVitamin A: 624IUVitamin C: 9mgCalcium: 70mgIron: 0.4mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Decadent Chocolate Ganache Tart

    12/22/2014 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

    Chocolate Tart With Hazelnut Crust

    When dessert demands chocolate, this decadent chocolate ganache tart delivers. Silky, rich, and infused with hints of vanilla and orange, it's a showstopper that just happens to be gluten-free, grain-free, and dairy-free. Perfect for the holidays (or any special dinner), this indulgent tart offers a few simple variations-swap hazelnuts for almond flour, or try a touch of peppermint instead of orange. A small slice is all it takes to satisfy even the strongest chocolate craving.

    A decadent dark chocolate tart with a golden crust on a gray plate.

    As I planned my holiday menu, I knew I wanted something chocolate for dessert-something rich, elegant, and worthy of an "oh wow" moment. A showstopper that would send everyone into chocolate heaven and leave them swooning at the table. This dark chocolate ganache tart is just that-and the best part? You can make it ahead. I'm so excited to share this recipe with you for Thanksgiving, Christmas, and the holidays.

    This filling is a take off on something called a French ganache, usually made with heavy cream. I've used whole coconut milk instead. It's rich and smooth with absolutely no taste of coconut.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love This Chocolate Ganache Tart

    • Elegant, yet effortless - Looks impressive, but it's surprisingly easy to make. They'll think you're a genius.
    • All about the chocolate - Rich, smooth, and deeply satisfying.
    • No fussy crust - Press-in cookie-style tart crust means no rolling, no stress.
    • Make-ahead friendly - Prepare in advance and garnish just before serving.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Chocolate Tart Crust

    • Nut flour - Use almond flour or hazelnut flour. Hazelnut adds classic flavor depth (think Nutella!), but almond works beautifully.
    • Coconut flour - Adds subtle sweetness and structure when blended with nut flours.
    • Unrefined sugar - Light brown sugar, sucanat, or coconut sugar all work well. Sucanat is coarser but melts during baking. Golden monk fruit should also work, though untested.
    • Unsalted butter - For dairy-free, use plant-based butter (stick, not tub) for best texture.

    Chocolate Ganache Tart Filling

    • Dark chocolate (70%-72%) - Use a high-quality bar, not chips.
    • Coconut milk - Canned full-fat coconut milk for a rich, creamy filling.
    • Large eggs - For structure and a silky texture.
    • Vanilla extract or paste - Adds depth of flavor.
    • Orange oil (optional) - Just a drop enhances the chocolate with a subtle citrus note, and chocolate and orange are a classic pairing. Do not use orange extract. Don't use orange extract. It must be oil if you are using. Oil has a stronger, purer flavor than extract. Find it at cooking stores, restaurant supplies and online

    Please see the recipe card for measurements.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Flavor twist - Add a drop or two of food-grade peppermint oil to the ganache for a festive spin.
    • Finishing touch - Drizzle with melted white chocolate just before serving f

    No Pastry Press-in Crust

    Whether you eat gluten-free or not, you are bound to love this crisp, cookie-like crust. It's easy to make. No dealing with rolling out pastry. Just press the simple dough into a 9 ½-inch light colored metal tart pan with a removable bottom. They are inexpensive and available at kitchen supply stores and online.

    If you've never made a tart crust like this, don't be intimidated. It really is easy and only takes a few minutes - about 12 to be exact. I've made it over and over again.

    The photo below is made with almond flour. The hazelnut flour is darker in color.

    For complete directions on how to make a tart crust please read here.

    Almond Coconut Crust|AFoodCentricLife.com

    Chef's tip: Chocolate is the star of this tart, so choose a high-quality bittersweet variety around 70-72%. Some of my favorites are Theo, Guittard, Scharffen Berger, Valrhona, and Hu Kitchen, their Gems. They are organic, no dairy, no GMO's, no emulsifiers, no lecithins, no gluten, no refined or cane cane. No weird ingredients! Just good, clean, terrific chocolate.

    Weighing chocolate discs on a glass top digital kitchen scale.

    Chef's tip - For accuracy, weigh the chocolate on a digital kitchen scale, a great and inexpensive addition to your kitchen tools.

    How to Melt Chocolate

    Chocolate is best melted slowly and gently in a double boiler (or it can get grainy instead of stay smooth). Place a bowl over a pan of simmering water. Just a few inches of water will do. The bottom of the bowl should not touch the water.

    Place chocolate bits, wafers or finely chopped pieces into the bowl and allow it to melt. Stir occasionally until smooth.

    Showing a double boiler set up with a pot topped with a glass bowl on stove top.

    After chocolate is melted, turn off the heat, remove the bowl from the pan and let the chocolate cool a little. You don't want the eggs to scramble when being added to the chocolate. Add coconut milk, beaten eggs, vanilla and orange oil. Stir until smooth.

    Chef's tip: chocolate and water are enemies. If you get water (or steam) into the chocolate it might seize or harden up, so be extra careful.

    Making chocolate filling, pouring coconut milk into melted chocolate.

    Pour the filling into a pre-baked tart crust and bake for 20 minutes at 350º.

    Pouring the liquid chocolate filling into a tart crust.

    Serving Suggestions

    After baking, cool, chill the chocolate ganache tart before slicing to serve. If you want, top with a dollop of whipped cream, use either whipped coconut or whipped dairy cream. For yet another garnish, sprinkle with chocolate jimmies.

    Chef's storage tip: Do not place plastic film right on top of the tart surface as it will stick. When you try to take it off it will mess up the pretty, smooth surface. If you do, you can always cover with whipped cream. Place a large piece of parchment or waxed paper over the top of the baking tray first to cover, then wrap in plastic film (after tart has cooled).

    A single slice of chocolate tart on a black plate with silver fork.

    Recipe FAQs

    What's the best way to melt chocolate?

    Either in a microwave on lower power stirring every 20 seconds or so, or on the stove top by setting up a double boiler. Melt chocolate slowly so it does not get grainy. Too high of heat in the microwave can burn chocolate. Go slow and be careful.

    What's the best chocolate for a chocolate tart?

    Use a dark, often called bittersweet, chocolate around 70% - 72%.

    Can I make this ahead of time?

    The tart holds well refrigerated and wrapped for about 2 days, so save time and make it ahead.

    More Chocolate Recipes

    If you love tarts, try this pumpkin tart recipe. It's not just for Thanksgiving. And for more chocolate recipes, try these.

    • bittersweet chocolate pudding
      Chocolate Pots de Creme (Dairy-Free)
    • chocolate dipped strawberries
      How to Make Chocolate Dipped Strawberries
    • Glass mug of hot chocolate with whipped cream.
      Easy Spiked Hot Chocolate
    • Bark bites on a round display plate for serving.
      Chocolate Bark Recipe (bark bites)

    ⭐️Did You Make This?

    If you make this chocolate tart, please comment and let me know, and if you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Chocolate Tart With Hazelnut Crust

    Chocolate Ganache Tart (gluten-free, dairy-free)

    Sally Cameron
    When dessert has to be chocolate, this recipe will knock your socks off. Decadent, rich, smooth, and chocolaty with a hint of orange. All of this, and gluten-free too. Make it up to several days ahead. It holds well wrapped and refrigerated.  
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 30 minutes mins
    Cook Time 25 minutes mins
    Total Time 55 minutes mins
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Servings 8
    Calories 536 kcal

    Equipment

    • 1 9 ½" tart pan with removable bottom and 1" deep side
    • 1 half sheet size rimmed baking pan for baking and stability moving tart
    • 1 silicone mat for stability moving tart, optional

    Ingredients
      

    Hazelnut Tart Crust

    • 1 ½ cups hazelnut flour or almond flour 5 ½ ounces
    • ½ cup ounces coconut flour 2 ¼ ounces
    • 2 tablespoons light brown sugar
    • 6 tablespoons unsalted butter, melted or plant butter (stick not tub)
    • 1 pinch sea salt

    Chocolate Filling

    • 9 ounces high quality bittersweet chocolate 70%-72%
    • 10 ounces canned whole coconut milk do not use low fat
    • 2 large eggs beaten
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract I use double vanilla
    • ½ teaspoon orange oil optional
    • 1 pinch sea salt

    Optional Garnish

    • whipped coconut or dairy cream as garnish optional
    • chocolate shavings

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Make the tart crust

    • It takes 10-12 minutes to mix and press into the tart pan and another 18 minutes to bake at 350ºF. The tart crust can be baked ahead, wrapped tightly and keep at room temperature for a day before filling. To bake it right away, leave oven set up 350°F. Allow the tart crust to cool before filling and baking

    Make the filling

    • To make the filling, set up a double boiler. Place a medium pan filled with a few inches of water over medium heat. Bring to a simmer.  Turn heat to low, place a medium bowl over the top of the pan of simmering water. Do not allow the bottom of the bowl to touch the water.  Add chocolate. Allow chocolate to melt slowly. Stir occasionally.
      Remove from the heat and allow to cool for a few minutes, then stir in coconut milk, eggs. vanilla, orange and salt. Do not put the eggs into hot chocolate or the eggs could scramble. Stir until smooth, then pour into the baked tart crust.

    Bake the tart

    • Bake chocolate filled tart on a rimmed baking sheet with a silicone mat (to prevent sliding) approximately 20-22 minutes or until the chocolate filling is set and fairly firm. Remove tart from the oven and allow to cool completely, then refrigerate.

    Notes

    Wrapping for refrigeration
    Do not place plastic film right on top of the tart surface as it will stick. When you try to take it off it will mess up the pretty, smooth surface. If you do, you can always cover with whipped cream.
    Place a large piece of parchment or waxed paper over the top first to cover, then wrap in plastic film (after tart has cooled). For catered parties I've found you can get 12 thin wedges out of this tart instead of 8, especially if serving other desserts. 
    Make ahead tip
    Crust can be made a day ahead, wrapped and stored at room temperature until ready to fill and bake. 
     

    Nutrition

    Calories: 536kcalCarbohydrates: 30gProtein: 8gFat: 44gSaturated Fat: 22gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 7gTrans Fat: 0.4gCholesterol: 65mgSodium: 46mgPotassium: 293mgFiber: 8gSugar: 17gVitamin A: 338IUVitamin C: 2mgCalcium: 64mgIron: 4mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Chocolate Blueberry Smoothie (high protein)

    01/12/2015 by Sally Cameron 2 Comments

    chocolate blueberry smoothie

    Here's a smoothie that's as delicious as it is nutritious. Made with blueberries, cocoa, and a handful of wholesome ingredients, this chocolate blueberry smoothie is a simple way to start your day with something creamy, satisfying, and naturally sweet. It's loaded with antioxidants and rich flavor, perfect for breakfast or a quick afternoon pick-me-up.

    A chocolate blueberry smoothie in a glass with purple striped straws and blueberries beside.

    I created this chocolate blueberry smoothie to combine wholesome ingredients with rich flavor. Blueberries and cocoa are packed with antioxidants, and together they make a creamy, satisfying smoothie that tastes like dessert but supports a healthy start to the day.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love This Smoothie

    • Chocolatey and nourishing: Packed with antioxidants from blueberries and cocoa for a feel-good start to your day.
    • Quick and versatile: Ready in minutes for breakfast, a post-workout refuel, or an easy grab-and-go option.
    • Customizable: Adjust the ingredients to fit your tastes and nutrition goals-more protein, extra berries, or your favorite milk.

    Try my recipe for homemade cashew milk as an alternative to almond milk.

    What You'll Need

    • Milk: I use homemade almond milk as the base for most of our smoothies. If you;re buying it, be sure to read the labels for additives you don't want.
    • Berries: Frozen blueberries make this easy year-round, but fresh work too.
    • Greens: Baby spinach blends right in and adds extra nutrients without affecting the flavor. Buy the pre-washed containers.
    • Cocoa Powder: For rich chocolatey goodness-and a boost of antioxidants.
    • Banana: Adds natural sweetness and creaminess.
    • Protein Powder: Use your favorite. We like one that provides 20 grams of protein per scoop.

    Quick homemade coconut milk is good too.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Other milks - Try oat milk, coconut milk, hemp seed milk, cashew milk, and others depending on any allergies or sensitivities.
    • Spice: A little cinnamon for warmth and depth.
    • Sweetener - Use a little honey or maple syrup, or try zero-sugar honey or sugar-free simple syrup if you prefer it lower in sugar (we do, they work great, skip the sugar).
    • Vanilla - Add a touch of vanilla extract.

    How to Make a Chocolate Blueberry Smoothie

    Ingredients for a chocolate blueberry smoothie i  a blender container ready for blending.

    Making smoothies is so easy and fast. Add milk, then protein powder, then everything else and blend away until smooth. Add a little sweetener if preferred and taste.

    Chef's Note:
    I make homemade nut milks for smoothies because they're free of additives, gums, and preservatives. You can strain them for a smoother texture or leave them unstrained to keep more fiber (why toss the good stuff?). Sweeten or leave them plain depending on your taste. Store nuts in a cool pantry so they stay fresh, and make milk any time you need it. For the most consistent results, weigh your nuts on a digital scale rather than measuring by volume.

    A glass dairy bottle of homemade almond milk with raw almonds on a wooden table.

    Serving Suggestions

    • Enjoy right after blending for the freshest flavor and creamy texture.
    • Pour into an insulated container for a grab-and-go breakfast on busy mornings.
    • Serve as a post-workout snack to refuel with protein and antioxidants.
    • Top with a sprinkle of cacao nibs, chia seeds, or a few extra berries.
    • Freeze leftovers in popsicle molds for a cool, healthy treat.

    Be sure to check out my guide on The Ultimate Guide to Making Healthy Smoothies!

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I make this smoothie ahead of time?

    Yes-blend it and store in the fridge for up to 24 hours. Shake or stir before drinking, as separation is natural.

    What's the best protein powder to use?

    Use any protein powder you like. I prefer an unsweetened variety with about 20 grams of protein per scoop. Be sure to read labels carefully for ingredients. You can add your own sweeteners and flavors in a healthier way than what most include.

    Can I skip the banana?

    Yes-though the banana adds natural sweetness and creaminess. If you leave it out, you may want to add a little extra sweetener or a few ice cubes to maintain the texture.

    How do I make it nut-free?

    Oat milk is my best recommendation and it's makes a nice creamy smoothie. Rice milk is falling out of favor because of arsenic concerns, especially for kids. And coconut is often off the table for people with tree nut allergies, even though botanically it's a drupe, not a nut. Many allergists still advise avoiding it if the allergy is severe. Use oat milk and be sure your protein powder is nut-free.

    More Smoothie Recipes

    Find more recipes and inspiration on the smoothie and juices page.

    • Beautiful bright pink red beet smoothies in tall glasses with red beets on the side.
      Healthy Red Beet Smoothie with Berries
    • Creamy light green cucumber mint smoothie in a glass with lime slice.
      Refreshing Cucumber Smoothie Recipe
    • Strawberry banana smoothie in a glass.
      Strawberry Yogurt Smoothie with Banana
    • Creamy orange pumpkin pie smoothie in a glass with a silver straw.
      Pumpkin Smoothie (Healthy & Easy)

    ⭐️Did You Make This?

    If you made hemp mylk, please comment and let me know, I love to read your comments. If you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    chocolate blueberry smoothie

    Chocolate Blueberry Smoothie

    Sally Cameron
    A healthy brain requires healthy fuel. Here's a smoothie that's good for our brains. Start the day right with this smoothie and you just might think smarter and make better decisions.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Total Time 5 minutes mins
    Course Breakfast
    Cuisine American
    Servings 1
    Calories 277 kcal

    Equipment

    • blender

    Ingredients
      

    • 10 ounces almond milk
    • ½ cup blueberries or blackberries
    • 1 big handful baby spinach leaves
    • 2 teaspoons unsweetened cocoa powder
    • ½ banana
    • 1 scoop protein powder of choice about 20 grams protein

    Optional add-ins

    • 2 teaspoons zero-sugar honey, honey, or zero-sugar simple syrup optional
    • ½ teaspoon cinnamon
    • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Place everything in a blender and blend until smooth. Drink immediately.

    Notes

    Check out the easy recipe for homemade almond milk on this site. Once you make homemade, you will never buy it again. 

    Nutrition

    Calories: 277kcalCarbohydrates: 33gProtein: 30gFat: 6gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gCholesterol: 50mgSodium: 460mgPotassium: 714mgFiber: 7gSugar: 17gVitamin A: 5480IUVitamin C: 28mgCalcium: 524mgIron: 4mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!
    • « Previous Page
    • 1
    • …
    • 8
    • 9
    • 10
    • 11
    • Next Page »
    Chef Sally Cameron of aFoodcentricLife.com in her kitchen.

    Welcome! I'm Sally, a professionally trained chef, former personal chef and caterer, lover of fresh healthy food, and sharing it with others.

    More about me →

    Best Fall Recipes

    • A gray bowl of pumpkin risotto with a golden spoon and sage leaves.
      Creamy Pumpkin Risotto With Sage
    • A gray bowl of air fryer butternut sqhuas with pepitas and sage leaves with gray napkin.
      Air Fryer Butternut Squash
    • A saute pan of Chicken Marsala without cream, topped with mushroom sauce and herbs.
      Chicken Marsala Recipe (No Cream)
    • The deep colors of beef barley soup in a white bowl with herbs.
      Beef Barley Soup Recipe (Gluten-Free Option)
    • A golden loaf of pumpkin bread sliced and ready to enjoy with coffee.
      Easy Gluten-Free Pumpkin Bread Recipe
    • Deep red and golden roasted beets tossed with vinaigrette, herbs, feta, and nuts in a salad bowl.
      Beet Salad with Feta

    Best Fall Recipes -->

    Footer

    as seen on

    Logos of Featured Publications

    About

    • Privacy Policy
    • Disclaimer
    • Terms & Conditions
    • Accessibility policy

    Newsletter

    • Sign Up! for emails and recipes.

    Menu

    • Home
    • About
    • Contact
    • Facebook
    • Instagram
    • Pinterest

    As an Amazon Associate I earn from qualifying purchases.

    Copyright © 2026 aFoodcentricLife.com

    Rate This Recipe

    Your vote:




    A rating is required
    A name is required
    An email is required